April 2016
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Navigator
Litho in U.S.A.
HL7J 19A321 AA
Owner’s Manual
2017 NAVIGATOR
Owner’s Manual
2017 NAVIGATOR
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications,
design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language
in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2016
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20160329163739
Introduction
About This Manual............................................7
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65................................11
Perchlorate........................................................12
Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services.........................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Special Notices.................................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Export Unique Options...................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment..........................15
Child Safety
General Information........................................16
Installing Child Restraints..............................18
Booster Seats..................................................26
Child Restraint Positioning...........................29
Child Safety Locks..........................................30
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation...................................32
Fastening the Seatbelts................................33
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................35
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime............................................................36
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................37
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................39
Seatbelt Extension.........................................39
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation.....................................41
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................43
Side Airbags.....................................................44
Safety Canopy™...............................................45
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........47
Airbag Disposal...............................................48
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................49
Remote Control...............................................50
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................53
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................54
Creating a MyKey...........................................55
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Checking MyKey System Status.................58
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems........................................................59
MyKey Troubleshooting................................59
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking..................................61
Power Liftgate..................................................64
Keyless Entry...................................................68
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System............................70
Anti-Theft Alarm...............................................71
1
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards......................72
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................74
Audio Control...................................................75
Voice Control...................................................78
Cruise Control..................................................79
Information Display Control.........................79
Heated Steering Wheel.................................79
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals......................................80
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers...........................................81
Autowipers........................................................81
Windshield Washers......................................82
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............82
Lighting
General Information.......................................84
Lighting Control...............................................84
Autolamps.........................................................85
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................86
Daytime Running Lamps...............................86
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................87
Direction Indicators........................................88
Welcome Lighting...........................................88
Interior Lamps..................................................88
Ambient Lighting............................................89
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................90
Exterior Mirrors.................................................91
Interior Mirror...................................................92
Childminder Mirror.........................................92
Rear Quarter Windows..................................93
Sun Visors.........................................................93
Moonroof..........................................................94
Instrument Cluster
Gauges..............................................................96
Warning Lamps and Indicators....................98
Audible Warnings and Indicators...............101
Information Displays
General Information.....................................102
Information Messages.................................108
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control.........................122
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................124
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............126
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................127
Remote Start...................................................127
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position....................129
Head Restraints.............................................129
Power Seats.....................................................131
Memory Function..........................................132
Rear Seats.......................................................134
Heated Seats...................................................141
Climate Controlled Seats............................142
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................145
2
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................150
Storage Compartments
Center Console.............................................152
Overhead Console.......................................152
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information......................................153
Keyless Starting.............................................153
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................154
Engine Block Heater.....................................157
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................159
Fuel Quality....................................................160
Fuel Filler Funnel Location..........................161
Running Out of Fuel......................................161
Refueling.........................................................162
Fuel Consumption.........................................164
Emission Control System............................166
Transmission
Automatic Transmission..............................169
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive...............................174
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential.................................181
Brakes
General Information......................................182
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................182
Parking Brake.................................................183
Hill Start Assist...............................................183
Traction Control
Principle of Operation..................................185
Using Traction Control.................................185
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................187
Using Stability Control.................................188
Terrain Response
Using Hill Descent Control..........................191
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................193
Rear Parking Aid............................................194
Front Parking Aid...........................................194
Rear View Camera........................................195
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation..................................199
Using Cruise Control....................................199
Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System..................201
Steering..........................................................206
Drive Control.................................................207
Self-Leveling Suspension..........................208
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................209
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................210
Load Limit.........................................................211
3
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Towing
Towing a Trailer..............................................216
Trailer Sway Control......................................217
Recommended Towing Weights................217
Essential Towing Checks...........................220
Towing Points................................................226
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........227
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................228
Reduced Engine Performance..................228
Economical Driving......................................228
Driving Through Water...............................229
Floor Mats......................................................229
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance....................................231
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................232
Fuel Shutoff...................................................232
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................233
Transporting the Vehicle............................236
Towing Points................................................236
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................238
In California (U.S. Only)...............................239
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................240
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)............................................241
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.......................................................242
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................243
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......244
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................244
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart............................246
Changing a Fuse..........................................259
Maintenance
General Information....................................262
Opening and Closing the Hood...............262
Under Hood Overview................................264
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................266
Engine Oil Check.........................................266
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................267
Engine Coolant Check................................268
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check......272
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................273
Brake Fluid Check........................................273
Washer Fluid Check.....................................274
Fuel Filter........................................................275
Changing the 12V Battery..........................275
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................277
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................277
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................278
Changing a Bulb...........................................279
Bulb Specification Chart..............................281
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................283
Vehicle Care
General Information.....................................285
Cleaning Products.......................................285
Cleaning the Exterior..................................286
Waxing............................................................288
Cleaning the Engine....................................288
4
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.........................................................289
Cleaning the Interior...................................289
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................291
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................291
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................292
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................292
Vehicle Storage............................................293
Wheels and Tires
General Information....................................295
Tire Care.........................................................298
Using Snow Chains.......................................312
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..............313
Changing a Road Wheel.............................319
Technical Specifications.............................326
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications..................................328
Motorcraft Parts............................................329
Vehicle Identification Number..................330
Vehicle Certification Label.........................330
Transmission Code Designation................331
Capacities and Specifications...................332
Audio System
General Information.....................................339
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................340
Satellite Radio...............................................343
USB Port..........................................................347
Media Hub......................................................347
SYNC™ 3
General Information.....................................348
Home Screen................................................366
Using Voice Recognition............................367
Entertainment................................................378
Climate.............................................................391
Phone..............................................................396
Navigation......................................................404
Apps..................................................................414
Settings............................................................417
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting..........................434
Accessories
Accessories....................................................451
Lincoln Protect
Lincoln Protect..............................................453
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information...........456
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.............460
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................464
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............468
Appendices
End User License Agreement...................488
5
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the vehicle
you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
7
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
8
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada in Canada), and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted
by law, use vehicle diagnostic information
for vehicle improvement or with other
information we may have about you, (e.g.,
your contact information), to offer you
9
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
products or services that may interest you.
Data may be provided to our service
providers such as part suppliers that may
help diagnose malfunctions, and who are
similarly obligated to protect data. We retain
this data only as long as necessary to
perform these functions or to comply with
law. We may provide information where
required in response to official requests to
law enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with lawful
authority or court order, and such information
may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S.
only (if equipped), if you choose to use
connected apps and services, such as SYNC
Vehicle Health Report or MyFord Mobile App,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used to
provide services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you products
and services that may interest you, where
permitted by law. For Canada only, for more
information, please review the Ford of
Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca,
including our U.S. data storage and use of
service providers in other jurisdictions who
may be subject to legal requirements in
Canada, the United States and other
countries applicable to them, for example,
lawful requirements to disclose personal
information to governmental authorities in
those countries.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
10
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
11
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
WARNINGS
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
12
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate that these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A
great way to know for sure you are getting
this level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not follow
the instruction highlighted by the warning
symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
Never place front seat mounted
rear-facing child or infant seats in front
of an active passenger airbag.
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING
Use of wireless plug-in devices in the
OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) may
allow unauthorized third parties to gain
access to vehicle systems and data which
could impair the function of various vehicle
systems, including safety-related systems.
The DLC should only be used by a repair
facility that operates in accordance with
Ford’s service and repair instructions.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction
with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle
diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming
services. Installing an aftermarket device that
uses the DLC during normal driving for
purposes such as remote insurance company
monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to
other devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
13
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
interference with or even damage to vehicle
systems. We do not recommend or endorse
the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless
approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will
not cover damage caused by an aftermarket
plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
15
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child safety
restraints must be bought separately from
your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly install
the child restraint in your vehicle and that
you consult your pediatrician to make sure
you have a child restraint appropriate for
your child. To locate a child restraint fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
WARNINGS
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371
or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat
Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain
children in child restraints made especially
for their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or death
to your child.
On hot days, the temperature inside
the vehicle can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
16
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seatback upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
17
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position.
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
18
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode. This vehicle does not require the
use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
19
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E206121
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
20
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will help to remove remaining
slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no more
than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the vehicle seatback and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one
top tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach
the child seat, however the seatbelt can still
be used to attach the child seat if the lower
anchors are not used. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also be
attached to the proper top tether anchor, if
a top tether strap has been provided with
your child seat. We recommend the use of
a child safety seat having a top tether strap.
See Using Tether Straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating positions
marked with the child seat symbol.
21
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E205021
E206122
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback, below the locator symbols on the
seatback. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to properly install
a child seat with LATCH attachments.
E144054
The locator symbols are on round plastic
buttons for the center seat and on
rectangular tags for the outboard seats.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors shown.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child seat from side to side and forward
and back where it is secured to the vehicle.
The seat should move less than one inch
when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
22
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are
equipped with built-in tether strap anchors
located behind the seats as described below.
In the third row center seating position, the
tether anchor is a loop at the bottom of the
seatback.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view).
Second row bench seat
E205023
Second row bucket seats
E205024
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the correct
tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors
of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH
attachments, do not tighten the tether strap
enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle
seat cushion when the child is seated in it.
Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting
the front of the child seat. Keeping the child
seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the
best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
23
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Second row outboard seating positions
E205025
Second row center seating position (if
equipped)
E205026
1. For center seating positions, route the
child safety seat tether strap over the
back of the seat. For outboard seating
positions, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If the top of the safety
seat hits the head restraint, recline the
seat back slightly to obtain proper fit.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
E205027
3. Grasp the tether strap and position it to
the seat frame.
E205028
4. Rotate the tether strap, and clip the tether
strap to the anchor on the seat frame.
E205029
5. Rotate the tether strap clip.
24
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Third row center seating position
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
E205030
2. Locate the anchor webbing loop for the
seating position. You may need to pull
back the top of the hinged panel along
the bottom of the seatback to access the
tether anchor.
E205032
3. Clip the tether strap through the anchor
loop as shown. If the tether strap is
clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the event
of a crash.
E205033
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If the safety seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with
a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
25
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
26
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back
or no head restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child's head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a higher seat
back or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
27
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
28
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. If all children cannot be
seated and restrained properly in a rear
seating position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
29
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined weight of
child and child seat
Restraint Type
Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 129).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
30
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E205034
The locks are located on the rear edge of
each rear door and must be set separately
for each door.
Move the lock control up to engage the lock.
Move it down to disengage the lock.
31
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
All occupants of the vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection in
an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt).
32
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts when activated. In frontal and
near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the pretensioners will be activated
when the Safety Canopy is activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the seatbelt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
seatbelt should fit snug and be positioned
low across the hips. The shoulder portion of
the seatbelt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow
this practice. See the following figure.
33
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the seatbelt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all seatbelts
should be checked for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly must
be replaced if the seatbelt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other seatbelt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode. The front outboard passenger and
rear seat seatbelts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination seatbelts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
34
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
16).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates
the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjuster
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
E205035
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
35
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Second Row Comfort Guide
WARNING
Position the safety belt comfort guide
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
E205036
The second row outboard lap and shoulder
belt is equipped with a belt comfort guide.
This guide is attached to the quarter trim
panel. Use it to adjust the comfort of the
shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the
outboard second row seats.
E205037
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide
(the portion of the belt between the latch
tongue and the D-ring, not the portion
where the belt exits from the quarter trim
panel).
2. Slide the guide up or down along the
webbing so that the belt is centered on
the occupant’s shoulder.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
36
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat and a safety
belt is unbuckled.
37
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You buckle your safety belt before you switch the ignition on or less
than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you buckle your safety belt.
You do not buckle your safety belt before your vehicle reaches at
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the
ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you buckle your safety belt.
The driver safety belt is unbuckled for about 1 minute while the vehicle
is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• All vehicle doors are closed.
• The driver safety belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 60 seconds.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
38
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
• This will switch the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This will switch the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However, if
the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 285).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in serious
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNINGS
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Lincoln Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle, model
year and seating position. The use of an
extension intended for another vehicle,
model year or seating position may not offer
you the full protection of your vehicle’s
seatbelt restraint system.
Never use seatbelt extensions to install
child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over the
lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to
reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Lincoln Motor Company dealers. Only Lincoln
39
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
seatbelt extensions made by the same
company which made the original equipment
seatbelts, should be used with Lincoln
seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your
extension is compatible with your Lincoln
vehicle restraint system.
40
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child restraints.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. To avoid risk of
injury, do not touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
41
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
Restraint Safety System
The restraint safety system provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle restraint safety system consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt
usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensor(s), safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the restraint safety system work?
The restraint safety system can adapt the
deployment strategy of your vehicle’ s safety
devices according to crash severity and
occupant conditions. A collection of crash
and occupant sensors provides information
to the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or
either one or both stages of the dual-stage
airbag supplemental restraints based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
42
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and
torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and passenger front airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration recommends a minimum
distance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. Properly
seated occupants sit upright, lean against
the seat back, and center themselves on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably
extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can
43
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
increase the chance of injury in a crash
event. For example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet
up, the chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come
into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side airbags
and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
44
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found on
your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the seatback
of the driver and front passenger seats.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact with
a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
45
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including the A,
B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label
or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
46
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body structure and
tow hooks) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module which
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the
Safety Canopy®. Based on the type of crash
(frontal impact, side impact or rollover), the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. See Instrument Cluster
(page 96). Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
47
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side impact crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
48
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones, battery
chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be able
to use your remote control. You can lock and
unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You press any button on the keyless
entry keypad within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of
an intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 50).
49
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E138616
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the key
blade, then pull the blade out.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.
50
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto
the transmitter and install the key blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
The horn sounds and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will
sound twice and the direction indicators will
not flash.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from the outside. The transmitter has an
extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle
is remote started. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 122).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system does not work if any
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was driven.
51
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To start your vehicle remotely:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 102).
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the vehicle
runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on
the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 10 minutes, the duration
extends by another 10 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 20
minutes. You can extend the remote start
up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 102).
52
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Memory Feature
You can use the intelligent access key to
recall memory settings for the driver seat,
power mirrors, power steering column and
power adjustable foot pedals. Unlock your
vehicle with the intelligent access key to
recall the memory positions. You can
program the intelligent access key to recall
memory positions. See Memory Function
(page 132).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 70).
53
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be activated
with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a MyKey
and an admin key are present when you
start your vehicle, the system recognizes the
admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder. You
cannot disable this feature. The audio
system will mute when the front seat
occupants’ safety belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid, blind
spot information system (BLIS), cross
traffic alert, lane departure warning and
forward collision warning system.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions
(available only in some markets).
Note: When you switch lane departure
warning off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a
MyKey and before you recycle the key or
restart the vehicle. You can also change the
settings afterward with an admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed considering
posted speed limits and prevailing road
conditions. The driver is always responsible
to drive in accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could
result in accident or injury.
54
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed reminders so you
know when your vehicle approaches the
limits. Warnings appear in the information
display and an audible warning sounds
when you exceed the limit.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control, 911 Assist or
Emergency Assistance, or Do Not Disturb
(if your vehicle is equipped with these
features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped
with a push-button start, place the remote
control into the backup position. The
location of your backup position is in
another chapter. See Starting a
Gasoline Engine (page 154).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings.
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or remote control.
55
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 102).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey
56
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Action and DescriptionMessage
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
57
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 102).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine
how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has
been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
58
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Lincoln-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Lincoln-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot create a MyKey.
Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into the backup position. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 154).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at
least one admin key.
The passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
The transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot program the configurable
settings. There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot clear the MyKeys.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
Purchase a new key or transmitter from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
59
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see an authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-
Theft System (page 70).
I lost a key.
The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.The MyKey distance does not accumu-
late. An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.
An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the trans-
mitter. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 55).
60
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
A B
E163049
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch no longer
operates after 20 seconds. You must unlock
your vehicle with the remote control or
keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on, to
restore function to these switches. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See Information Displays (page 102).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
The liftgate release button only operates
when your vehicle's speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three seconds
to unlock all doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to indicate a change
to the unlocking mode. Driver door unlock
mode only unlocks the driver door when you
press the unlock button once. All door unlock
mode unlocks all doors when you press the
unlock button once. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control, keyless entry
keypad and intelligent access. You can also
change between the unlocking modes using
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 102).
Reprogramming the Unlocking Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
61
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for at
least four seconds with the ignition off. The
direction indicators flash twice to confirm the
change.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors.
The direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the direction indicators will flash if all the
doors and the liftgate are closed.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds twice
and the direction indicators do not flash. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 102).
Opening the Liftgate
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the liftgate.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within 3 ft
(1 m) of the driver door or liftgate.
At a Door
You can use the keyless entry keypad to lock
and unlock the doors. See Keyless Entry
(page 68).
At the Liftgate
The liftgate unlocks and opens automatically
when you press the liftgate release button.
See Power Liftgate (page 64).
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key inside
your vehicle after you close the last door. If
the system finds a key, all of the doors will
immediately unlock and the horn will sound
twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
62
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the remote
control and do not open a door within 45
seconds, your vehicle will lock and the alarm
will arm. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See Information
Displays (page 102).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle's speed is
less than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of
the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You stop your vehicle and switch the
ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
You can enable or disable autolock and
autounlock in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 102).
63
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts
off when it detects a certain amount of
battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and properly using
a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do
not allow children to operate or play
near an open or moving power liftgate. You
should supervise the operation of the power
liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
64
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One chime sounds if the ignition is on
and the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three chimes sound if the battery voltage
is below the minimum operating voltage.
• One chime sounds if the vehicle speed
is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds and
the liftgate closes under control. Remove any
excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle, for
example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
Press the button on the instrument
panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
65
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
E209083
A
B
2. Press button A.
Note: Allow the system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
turn on obstacle detection and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
Manually interfering with the liftgate motion
may also replicate a strut failure.
Opening the Liftgate Window
E209083
A
B
1. Press button B.
2. Pull the liftgate glass upward.
66
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
E209084
Press and release the button in the rear
cargo area.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This could
damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three chimes sound and the
system reverses to open. Once you remove
the obstacle, you can power close the
liftgate.
67
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate
is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce
and activate obstacle detection. To prevent
this, let the power liftgate close completely
before you enter your vehicle. Before driving
off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate
or door ajar message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open
while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E163050
You can use the keypad to lock or unlock
the doors without using a key.
For vehicles with intelligent access, you do
not need to enter a 5-digit entry code. Press
any button on keyless entry keypad once to
unlock all doors.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry code
through the information display.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if you
have set your own personal code.
68
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Recalling Memory Positions (If Equipped)
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 3, 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set 5-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the remote
control
• switching the ignition on.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
To Unlock All Doors
Press any button on keyless entry keypad
once to unlock all doors.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
(with the driver door closed). You do not
need to enter the keypad code first.
69
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Doors and Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting the
engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and
restart the engine if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. The intended design is to help
prevent the engine from starting unless a
coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may appear
in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
If you switch the ignition on with a coded key
you disarm the vehicle. If you unlock the
doors with the touch handle you disarm the
alarm.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your vehicle.
70
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
71
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
USING POWER RUNNING BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the running
boards not to deploy. Make sure that the
running boards have deployed, and have
finished moving before attempting to step
on them. The running boards will resume
normal function once the blockage is
cleared.
Turn off the running boards before
jacking or placing any object under
your vehicle. Never place your hand between
the extended running board and your
vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate more
slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door. This
can help you enter and exit your vehicle.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after a
two-second delay.
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display. See
General Information (page 102).
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page 102).
72
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Power Running Boards
• When disabled (OFF), the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
• When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction and
move to the end of travel if it encounters an
object while moving.
73
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Power Running Boards
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 129).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
The steering column may begin to move
again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 132).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to allow extra room to exit
your vehicle. The column will return to the
previous setting when you switch the ignition
on. You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 102).
74
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL
Operate the following functions with the
control:
75
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type One
E205755
Volume up.A
B Seek up or next.
Seek down or previous.C
Volume down.D
76
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E205756
Volume up.A
B Seek up or next.
Media.C
Seek down or previous.D
Volume down.E
Media
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio sources.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
77
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
VOICE CONTROL
Type One
E205757
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
78
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E205758
Phone mode.A
B Voice recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL
E205805
See Cruise Control (page 199).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E205806
See Information Displays (page 102).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped)
See your SYNC information.
79
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your feet
are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 132).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
80
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Pedals
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 277).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
E205527
Rotate the end of the control:
• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 277).
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior mirror.
The rain sensor monitors the amount of
moisture on the windshield and automatically
turns on the wipers. It adjusts the wiper
speed by the amount of moisture that the
sensor detects on the windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is automatically
set to on and remains on until you switch it
off in the information display. You can also
switch the feature back on at any time. See
General Information (page 102).
81
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor. Set the control to low
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. Set the control
to high sensitivity, and the wipers will turn
on when the rain sensor detects a small
amount of moisture on the windshield.
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts
the wiper speed according to the moisture
on the windshield only. Use the wiper lever
to wipe the windshield on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
E205528
Press the end of the wiper lever to activate
the washer:
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers
to swipe the windshield three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold activates the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can
switch this feature on and off through the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 102).
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch off the wiper
system before using an automatic car wash.
82
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
E205529
Rotate the control to select:
Intermittent operation - the
shortest pause between wipes.
2
Intermittent operation - the longest
pause between wipes.
1
Off.0
Rear Window Washer
E205529
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to activate the rear washer.
The control returns to the 2 or 0 position
when you release it.
83
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E173257
A
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
84
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch the
high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high beam
off.
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime fog.
Make sure the headlamps are switched to
auto or on, as appropriate, during all low
visibility conditions. Failure to do so may
result in a crash.
E173258
A
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps automatically turn
on in low light situations or when the wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
85
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 102).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the low beam headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
E163270
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable lit
components in the vehicle during headlamp
and parking lamp operation.
• Tap the top or bottom of the control to
brighten/dim all interior lit components
incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until the
desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the top of the control to
the full on position to activate the “dome
on” feature. This will turn on the interior
courtesy lights. The lights will remain on
until the bottom of the control is pressed.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Make sure the
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
86
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 102).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
102).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily override
autolamp control.
When switched off in the information display,
the daytime running lamps are off in all
lighting control switch positions.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
E161714
B
A
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position.
87
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system operates when you drive
your vehicle.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When your start your vehicle, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicator will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicator will flash for as long as you hold
the lever in this position.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They will project an image onto
the ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Map Lamps (If equipped)
The map lamps are located on the overhead
console. Press the controls on either side of
each map lamp to turn on the lamps. The
map lamps also light when:
88
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is
pressed up until the courtesy lamps come
on.
• any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
E163273
Rear Dome and Map Lamps
E163274
Your vehicle may have map lamps within the
rear dome lamp. Press the switches on either
side of the dome lamp to turn the lamps on.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
89
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Window Lock
E163057
A
B
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
90
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Accessory Delay
The window switches remain operational for
several minutes when you switch the ignition
off or until you open either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E163059
B
A
C
Left-hand mirror.A
Off.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you
want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position
to lock the mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors
E163060
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system
to reset and for function to return to normal.
Pull the control back to fold the mirrors in or
out.
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to reset
them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
91
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise
as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This
sound is normal. Repeat this process as
needed each time you manually fold the
mirrors.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
127).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 132).
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver exterior mirror automatically dims
with the auto-dimming interior mirror.
Signal Indicator Mirrors
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Blind Spot Monitor
See Blind Spot Information System (page
201).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
CHILDMINDER MIRROR
On double bin overhead consoles, the
conversation mirror allows the driver to view
the rear seating area.
WARNING
Do not use the childminder mirror to
view rearward traffic, do not allow rear
passengers to distract you from the driving
task, and make sure the rear view mirror has
a clear view of rearward traffic. Failure to do
so could increase the risk of a crash from an
unseen vehicle, which may result in serious
injury.
92
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E205354
Press the release area on the rear edge of
the bin door to open the childminder mirror.
The door will open to full open position.
The rear view mirror may have to be adjusted
to its lower arm position to prevent
interference when the childminder mirror is
extended down.
REAR QUARTER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E205283
Press and hold the VENT control to open the
rear quarter windows.
Pull and hold the VENT control to close the
rear quarter windows.
Note: Vehicles without a moonroof will only
have the VENT control.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
93
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
You can manually open or close the sliding
shade when the moonroof is closed. Pull the
shade toward the front of your vehicle to
close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E163063
Press and release the SLIDE control to open
the moonroof. The moonroof will stop short
of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
94
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically while
closing. It will reverse some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to override
this function. While bounce-back is active,
the closing force increases for each of the
next three times that you close the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT control
to close the moonroof.
95
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E205350
96
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Left Information Display.A
Speedometer.B
Right Information Display.C
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated distance
your vehicle has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 102).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 102).
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge
indicates approximately how much fuel
remains in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent
to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
The needle should move toward F when you
refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E
after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle
needs service soon.
After refueling, the needle may not always
return to the exact same position. This is
normal.
Note: It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station. This
is normal and depends upon the slope of
pavement at the gas station.
Note: The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the gauge
indicated. This is normal and depends upon
the slope of pavement at the gas station.
Note: If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different gas
pump nozzle.
Note: There is a small reserve left in the tank
when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low reminder displays when the distance
to empty reaches 50 miles (80 km) to empty.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
97
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You continue to have
the normal braking system (without ABS)
unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Brake System
E144522
It illuminates when you engage the
parking brake and the ignition is
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If the
parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by an authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may occur.
It will take you longer to stop your vehicle.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. Driving extended distances with
the parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control
E71340
It illuminates when you switch this
feature on. See Using Cruise
Control (page 199).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch the
left or right direction indicator or
the hazard warning flasher on. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burned out bulb.
98
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 268).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 266).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Fasten Seatbelt
It illuminates and a chime sounds
to remind you to fasten your
seatbelt.
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate on startup,
continues to flash or remains on, it
indicates a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. A
chime sounds when there is a malfunction
in the indicator light.
High Beam
It illuminates when the headlamp
high beam is switched on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent on.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Lights when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level is
low or near empty. Refuel as soon
as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash
at any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
99
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch the
parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain fault
has been detected. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after you
start the engine, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On Board
Diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 166).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when you first switch on the
ignition before engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light stays
on until you crank the engine, then turns
itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System (page 166).
Stability Control System
E138639
Displays when the
AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately. See Using
Stability Control (page 188).
Stability Control System Off
E130458
Illuminates when you disable
AdvanceTrac™/Traction control.
See Using Stability Control (page
188).
100
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
E161509
Illuminates when you activate the
tow/haul feature. If the light flashes
steadily, have the system serviced
immediately. Damage to the transmission
could occur. See Automatic Transmission
(page 169).
4X2
E163173
Illuminates momentarily when you
engage two-wheel drive high. If the
light fails to display or remains on
when the ignition is on, have the system
serviced immediately by an authorized
dealer.
4X4 Auto
E181781
Illuminates when you engage the
four-wheel drive system. If the light
fails to display or remains on when
the ignition is on, have the system serviced
immediately by an authorized dealer.
4X4 HIGH
E207351
Illuminates when you engage
four-wheel drive high. If the light
fails to display or remains on when
the ignition is on, have the system serviced
immediately by an authorized dealer.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you leave the key in the
ignition and the driver door open.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is
not in the ignition) and the driver door is
open.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Direction Indicator Chime
Sounds when you leave the direction
indicator on after signaling a turn and driving
the vehicle more than 1.5 miles (2.4 km).
101
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display controls
on the steering wheel. Corresponding
information shows in the information display.
E205352
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or message.
The arrows in the upper left corner of the
display indicate additional content available
when lit.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
• Display Mode.
• Trip/Fuel.
• Towing.
• Off Road.
• Settings.
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key or
OK to enter into that category. Press the left
arrow key as needed to exit back to the main
menu.
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following display options.
102
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
Digital tachometer and fuel level gauge
Digital tachometer, fuel level gauge and engine coolant temperature gauge
Gauge Detail (Oil pressure, Oil temperature and Transmission temperature)
Engine Hours (Engine hours and Engine idle hours)
Oil Life
Distance to Empty
Digital Speedometer - Press OK to change the currently units displayed
Trip/Fuel
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following trip and fuel options.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed information.
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
103
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
• Fuel Economy - Shows your
instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph
and average mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage
based on time. The graph is updated
each minute with the fuel economy that
you achieved during 30 minutes of
driving.
Towing
Use the arrow buttons to configure different
towing setting choices.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are optional.
Towing
Trailer disconnectedTrailer Status
Active trailer name or Default Trailer
Accumulated trailer miles
Trailer brake gain
Trlr Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabledTrailer Options
Elect. Surge, None or Elec. Over HydraulicTrailer Brake Mode
Trailers CreatedChange Trlr Select.
Default Trailer
No active trailer
Press OK to change the selected trailer
Rename TrailerChange Trlr Settings
Reset Trailer Mileage
104
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
Delete Trailer
Add Trailer
Naming EditorAdd TrailerTrailer Setup
Ball Coupler Connected and locked?Connect'n Checklist
Electrical Wiring Connect?
Lights Function Correctly?
Safety Chains Connected?
Tongue Jack Raised?
Mirrors Adjusted?
TBC gain setting adjusted?
Trailer disconnected?
Off Road
In this mode, you can view different off road
information.
105
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Off Road
Off Road Status (Pitch, Roll, Wheel Angle)
Power Distribution Gauge – Displays the power distribution to the front and rear axles. The display varies based on 4x4 configuration and
driving conditions.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Sport, Normal or ComfortDrive Control
Normal or TowingDTE Calculation
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabledVehicleAdvanced Settings
Select time intervalAutolamp DelayLighting
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
106
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All Doors or DriverRemote Unlock
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to resetOil Life
Enable or Disable switchPower Liftgate
Auto, Off or OutPwr Running Boards
Auto or Last SettingClimate ControlRemote Start
Auto or OffSeats
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabledWipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Number of Admin Keys, MyKeys and MyKey MileageMyKey StatusMyKey*
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
107
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
65 MPH (105 km/h), 70 MPH (110 km/h), 75 MPH (120
km/h), 80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Max Speed
45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph (89 km/h), 65 mph (105 km/
h) or Off
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/LDistanceDisplay Setup
°Fahrenheit or °CelsiusTemperature
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge Display
Select Language - Hold OK to SetLanguage
*Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages display or are available. Certain
messages may be abbreviated or shortened
depending upon which cluster type you
have.
108
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
E205353
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages automatically clear
after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
AdvanceTrac™ / Traction Control Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when you switch the traction control system off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 185).
Traction control off/Traction control on
Displays when the system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
Displays when you switch AdvanceTrac off.AdvanceTrac Off
Displays when you switch AdvanceTrac on.AdvanceTrac On
109
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Alarm Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when unauthorized entry into the vehicle occurs. Switch the ignition on to stop the
alarm.
Vehicle Alarm to Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle
Battery and Charging System Messages
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Check Charging System
Displays to warn of a low 12-volt battery condition. Switch off all unneeded electrical accessories.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Turn Power Off to Save Battery
Displays to warn of a low 12-volt battery condition. Switch off all unneeded electrical accessories.Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off
110
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information System Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the blind spot information system/cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked.
Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when a fault with the blind spot information system occurs. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displays when the blind spot information system/cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked.
Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when a fault with the cross traffic alert system occurs. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault
Displays when the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert (CTA) system is operating
and senses a vehicle.
Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X
111
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Brake System Messages
ActionMessage
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately.Brake Fluid Level Low
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Brake System
Displays when the parking brake is set, the vehicle is in ready to drive and the vehicle is driven
more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you release the parking brake, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Door Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
Displays when the liftgate or liftglass is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad resets.Factory Keypad Code XXXXX
112
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Engine Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine
temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on.Engine On
Fuel Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Displays as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
113
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access Messages
ActionMessage
Displas if the sytem does not detect the intelligent access key in the following three scenarios:
When you press the start/stop button in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through
the ignition states. When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed. When the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h) for the first time after starting.
No Key Detected
Displays during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key is programmed to the
system.
Key Programmed x Keys Total
Displays during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been
programmed.
Max Number of Keys Programmed
Displays when you press the start/stop button without applying the brake pedal. This is a reminder
that you must apply the brake pedal when pressing the start/stop button in order to start the
engine.
Press Brake to Start
Displays when you press the start/stop button to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access
Key is not detected inside the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Displays when the vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power Active
This message displays when there is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
114
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance Messages
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and switch off the engine. Check the oil level. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
Displays when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
Displays when the oil life left reaches 0%.Oil Change Required
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtemperature
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level LOW
Your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer
Your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer
115
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MyKey™ Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey active Drive Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to xx MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a
preselected speed.
Check Speed Drive Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder activates.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
Displays when attempting to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On MyKey Setting
MyKey park aid cannot be deactivated with a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
116
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Off Road Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when your vehicle speed requirement for off road mode entry has not
been met.
For Off Road Slow to 5MPH
Displays when off road mode becomes active.Enter Off Road Mode Enabled
Displays when off road mode becomes inactive.Exiting Off Road Mode
Displays when hill descent control mode deactivates.Hill Descent Control Off
Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 MPH (32 KM/H).For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
Displays when hill descent control mode requires driver shift transmission into
gear.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Displays when the hill control mode requires the driver to resume control.Hill Descent Driver Resume Control
Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control FAULT
Displays when hill descent control mode disables to cool the brake system.Hill Descent Control OFF System Cooling
Displays when hill descent control mode activates.Hill Descent Control Ready
117
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the transmission is in reverse (R) and the park aid disables.Check Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Displays when the transmission is in reverse (R) and the park aid disables.Check Rear Park Aid
Displays when the system detects a condition that requires service. See Parking Aids (page
193).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Power Steering Messages
ActionMessage
The power steering system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Steering loss Stop safely
The power steering system detects a condition within the power steering system that requires
service immediately. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering fault Service now
The power steering system disables power steering assist due to a system error. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Steering assist fault Service required
118
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Remote Start Messages
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to turn the key to on to drive the vehicle after a remote start.To Drive: Turn Key to On
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start button to drive the vehicle after a remote
start.
To Drive: Press Brake and START Button
Suspension System Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when there is a problem with your vehicle’ s suspension system. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Driver Select Susp. malfunction Service
required
119
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure.Tire Pressure LOW
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
Displays when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Wheels
and Tires (page 295). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized
dealer.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Trailer Messages
ActionMessage
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is not
connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: XX.X No Trailer
Displays and a chime sounds in response to faults sensed by the TBC.Trailer Brake Module Fault
Displays when a correct trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle.Trailer Connected
Displays when a trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally
or unintentionally, and the system senses it during a given ignition cycle.
Disregard this status if your vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed trailer
brake controller. This message may appear when an aftermarket TBC is used
even when the trailer is connected.
Trailer Disconnected
120
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the trailer sway control detects trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
Displays if there are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and the trailer wiring or
brake system.
Wiring Fault On Trailer
Displays the current gain setting from the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain XX.X
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module. See Towing a Trailer
(page 216).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual
There is a fault with your trailer stop lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer park lamp. Check your lamp.Trailer Park Lamps Fault Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing a Trailer (page 216).Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual
Transmission Messages
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to shift into park (P).Transmission not in Park
121
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E208604
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when you switch off dual zone mode.
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side.C
Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 141).D
122
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically
turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach
a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
G
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning may continue to operate even though the air
conditioning is switched off.
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.H
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature.
You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
I
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 127).J
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
K
Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 142).L
123
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully
open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Select the MAX A/C function.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
124
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
125
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
E188689
126
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 141).B
Temperature control: Control the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle.C
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute
air through any combination of these vents.
D
Fan speed control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger settings through the front controls.E
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time. Start the engine before you switch the
heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your previous settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system to
its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back on,
such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
127
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
102).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on previous settings). The
rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated
seats do not automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically turn on.
128
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and affect
the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during heavy
braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
129
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when the
seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head
restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second Row Outboard Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you can fold them.
130
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205038
The non-adjustable head restraints consist
of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure (A).
• A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the strap to fold the outboard head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place the
head restraint back to the upright
position.
Second Row Center Seat Head Restraint
The center rear head restraint is fixed and
non-adjustable. The head restraint consists
of a trimmed foam covering over the upper
structure of the seatback.
Third Row Head Restraints
The third row head restraints are non
adjustable, but you can fold them.
E205039
The non-adjustable head restraints consist
of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure (A).
• A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the strap to fold the head restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place the
head restraint back to the upright
position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback.
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is moving.
Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle
is in motion may cause loss of control of your
vehicle.
131
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E181777
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Move the switch in the direction
of the arrow to raise or lower the seat
cushion or to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
Power Recline
E162731
Move the control to recline the seatback
forward or rearward.
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to
prevent damage to the seat, the power seats
are designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the seat track. If the seat
encounters an object while moving forward
or backward, a new stopping position will
be set.
To reset the seat to its normal stopping
position:
1. After encountering the new stopping
position, press the power seat control
again to override.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the seat track.
3. Continue pressing the control for about
two seconds. You will feel the seat
bounce back slightly.
Power Lumbar
E164101
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Press the forward or rearward
side of the control for more or less support.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the memory seat,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
parts.
132
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Power steering column.
• Power adjustable foot pedals.
The memory control is on the left side of the
driver seat.
2
1
E205043
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions.
You can save a memory preset at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Switch the ignition on.
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The memory features will move to the
position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall preset memory
position when you switch the ignition off, or
when you place the transmission in park (P)
or neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Doors and
Locks (page 61).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror (or steering
column switch) (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
133
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone sounds
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until you hear a second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or intelligent access key is in range, the
memory function moves to the settings of
the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped)
This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit and
entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2 inches
(5 centimeters) rearward when the
transmission is in park (P) and you remove
the key from the ignition or you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you put the key in the ignition
or switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 102).
REAR SEATS
Folding Down the Second Row 40%
Seat
WARNINGS
Use caution when folding the seatback
to the flat back position as the system
will move forward when you lift the release
handle.
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the seatback to
make sure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in
the event of a sudden stop or crash.
Make sure that the head restraint is in the
down position and no objects such as books,
purses or briefcases are on the floor in front
of the second row seats before folding them
down.
Move the front passenger seat forward so
that the second row seat head restraint
clears the front seat.
134
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E190842
1. Lower the head restraints by pulling on
the strap.
E205044
2. Locate the handle on the side of the seat
cushion by the door.
3. Pull up on the handle and push the
seatback forward toward the front of the
vehicle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E205045
1. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you hear a click,
locking it in the upright position.
E205046
3. Lift up on the head restraint until it locks
into its original position.
Placing the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seats in Cargo Mode
WARNINGS
Use caution when folding the seatback
to the flat back position as the system
will move forward when you lift the release
handle.
Always return the seat from the kneel
position prior to raising the seatback.
Failure to do so could result in personal
injury.
135
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Place the second-row seats in a kneel down
load floor position to allow more cargo
space.
To place the seats in the cargo mode:
1. Fold down the second row seat.
E205047
2. Pull the cargo mode lever up to release
the seat into a kneel down load floor
position.
Returning to the Upright Position from
the Full Lowered Load Floor Position
You cannot return the seatback to the
upright position until the seat is returned
from the kneel down position.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E205048
1. Push the seat rearward until the latch is
engaged.
2. Return the seatback to the upright
position.
Adjusting the Second Row Outboard
40% Seat for E-Z Entry
WARNINGS
Always latch the vehicle seat to the
floor, whether the seat is occupied or
empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
WARNINGS
After using the E-Z Entry feature, make
sure there are not any objects, cargo
or the feet of a third row passenger under
the second row seat when latching the seat
to the floor. Injury to the third row passengers
feet or damage to the seat may occur.
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the seatback to
make sure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in
the event of a sudden stop or crash.
The E-Z entry seat allows for easier entry and
exit to and from the third row seat.
To enter the third row seat:
136
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205049
1. Fold down the second row seat and
release the handle.
2. Pull the handle up again until the seat
releases from the floor.
3. Push the seat upward and fold it away
from the third row.
To return the seat to a seating position:
E205050
1. Push the seat down and latch to the floor.
2. Bring the seatback to an upright position.
The seatback should lock into position.
Note: If the seatback will not return to the
upright position, tumble the seat again and
re-latch it to the floor. Be sure that cargo or
other objects are not trapped underneath
the seatback.
E205051
Note: If a squeak is heard from the latch
area, the latch striker pin should be wiped
clean of dust or debris.
137
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Exiting the Third Row
E205052
1. Pull the strap located at the bottom
outboard of the seatback to release the
seat from the floor, and rotate the seat
up toward the front seat.
2. Follow the directions above to return the
seat from the E-Z entry to the upright
position.
Reclining the Second Row Outboard
40% Seatback
WARNING
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat’s
safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
E205053
The release handle is located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion. Lift it to
adjust the seatback to your desired position.
Folding the Second Row Center 20%
Seat (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or safety belts, make sure that the
safety belts are not buckled when moving
the seat to the load floor position.
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped underneath
the seatback. After returning the seatback
to its original position, pull on the seatback
to make sure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in
the event of a sudden stop or crash.
138
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205054
1. Locate the release handle in the upper
left seatback. Pull the handle to release
the folding seat latch.
E205055
2. With the latch released, lower the
seatback into the load floor position.
E205056
3. To return the seat to the upright position,
lift the seatback until the latch is fully
engaged.
Adjusting the Second Row Center 20%
Seat (If Equipped)
Note: Move this seat forward to keep a child
in a child restraint close to the front seat
occupants. Move the seat to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by
older children or adults, including children
in booster seats.
E205057
Lift the handle to move the seat forward or
backward.
PowerFold™ Third Row Seat
Note: The power fold down seats operate
for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition
off. The transmission must be in park (P) and
the liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open.
Similar to the battery saver feature, the
power third row seat disables 10 minutes
after you switch the ignition off.
Note: Be sure that the head restraints are
folded down before powering the third row
seat down.
139
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E205060
The control buttons are located on the
right-hand rear quarter trim panel (accessible
from the liftgate area).
A
B
C
E211424
Press to fold the third row left side
seatback down.
A
Press to fold both seatbacks down.B
Press to fold the third row right
side seatback down.
C
To return the seatback(s) to the original
position(s), press the corresponding control
again.
If the power third row seat is disabled after
10 minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
140
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Rear Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
141
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch to
enable heating mode. When activated, they
will turn off automatically when you turn the
engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spill on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the
engine is running.
142
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes
air filters. You must replace them periodically.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 456).
Locate the filters under each front seat and
access them from the second-row footwell
area. Move the front seats all the way
forward and to the full up positions to ease
access.
E146319
To remove a filter:
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Press up on the outside rigid edge of the
filter and rotate counterclockwise once
the tabs are released, then remove the
filter.
143
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its housing
making sure that the far forward end is
all the way up in the housing.
2. Push in on the center of the outside edge
of the filter and rotate up into the housing
until it clips into position.
144
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are programming. Do
not program the system with the vehicle in
the garage.
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this
includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
145
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
146
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
147
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
148
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’ s authority
to operate the equipment.
149
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Do not use a power point for operating
a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the
power points can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This will damage
the power point and blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the rear cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the
device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power
point, since it will defeat the safety protection
design. Doing so may cause the power point
to overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when the
ignition is switched off or the battery voltage
drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
150
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
151
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E205765
Cup holder.A
Storage compartment, coin holder,
tissue box holder, and USB ports.
B
Power point, rear climate controls,
and 110 volt AC power point.
C
Rear cup holders.D
Side storage.E
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
152
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures
in the engine and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a
cell phone.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Note: A light on the button illuminates when
the ignition is on and when your vehicle
starts.
Switching the Ignition On
Type 1
E144447
153
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Type 2
E146431
Press the push button ignition switch once
without your foot on the brake pedal. It is on
the instrument panel near the steering wheel.
All electrical circuits and accessories are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
Press the push button ignition switch again
without your foot on the brake pedal to
switch the ignition off.
Starting Your Vehicle
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
Note: Releasing the brake pedal during
engine starting stops the engine from
cranking.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. You cannot attempt
to start the engine for at least 15 minutes.
After 15 minutes, you are limited to a
15-second engine cranking time. You need
to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle to shift the transmission
out of park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
154
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the passive key in this position, you
can use the push button ignition switch
to switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close a
door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key. You
cannot start your vehicle if the system does
not detect a valid passive key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
155
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
automatically shuts down your vehicle if it
has been idling for an extended period. The
ignition also turns off to save battery power.
Before your vehicle shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down. If you do not
intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle
shuts down. Another message appears in
the information display to inform you that
your vehicle has shut down to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for example
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 102). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the feature
off for the current ignition cycle only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shuts
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
156
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive
if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow it
to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This could
damage the power cable and may cause an
electrical short resulting in fire, injury and
property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
157
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
158
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out,
which could cause serious personal injury.
Fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded
fuel container.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
159
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. If fuel is splashed on the skin,
wash the affected areas immediately with
plenty of soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience
any adverse reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high
altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
below 87. We do not recommend these fuels.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well as
other conditions, for example when towing
a trailer. See Towing (page 216).
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that will not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
160
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine. If your vehicle is out
of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel
may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel system filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the household
refuse or the public sewage system.
Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the plastic funnel included
with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel
Location (page 161).
161
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
5. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back
in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNINGS
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will fill the
expansion space in the fuel tank and could
lead to fuel overflowing.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow
any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
162
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206911
A B
C D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
D
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting
on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe
opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B
when refueling. Holding the fuel nozzle
in position A can affect the flow of fuel
and shut off the fuel nozzle before the
fuel tank is full.
163
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206912
A B
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
System Warnings (If Equipped)
If the fuel filler inlet does not fully close a
warning message appears in the information
display.
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
3. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
4. Check the fuel filler inlet and the area
around it for any items or debris that may
be obstructing its movement.
5. Insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel filler
funnel provided with your vehicle in to
the fuel tank filler pipe opening. This
action should dislodge any debris that
may be preventing the fuel filler inlet from
fully closing.
Note: If this action corrects the problem the
message may not reset immediately. If the
message remains and the service engine
soon warning lamp appears in the
information display, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel
in the empty reserve varies and should not
be relied upon to increase driving range.
164
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that you can add to
the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty, before the first fuel filler
nozzle automatic shutoff event.
• The advertised capacity is equal to the
volumetric difference between actual fuel
fill before the first fuel filler nozzle
automatic shutoff event and the fuel
quantity when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328). It is the usable
capacity minus the empty reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may be
able to add more fuel than the advertised
capacity of the fuel tank when the fuel
gauge indicates empty.
Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is your
engine’s break-in period). A more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi
(3,200 km) to 3,000 mi (4,800 km). Also, fuel
expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge
readings are not accurate ways to measure
fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per gallon)
fuel consumption, divide miles traveled by
gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’ s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Keeping records during summer
and winter will show how temperature
impacts fuel economy.
165
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces fuel
economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue
to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service of
components affecting emission control, such
non-Ford parts should be equivalent to
genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
166
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 162).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city and highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness and lead to more
costly repairs.
167
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
your vehicle may need service.
See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours with the ignition off. Then, start the
vehicle and complete the above driving
cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its
normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the vehicle until
the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
168
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure you shift the gearshift lever
to park (P). Switch the ignition off and remove
the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not use the tow/haul feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as
the increased engine braking can cause the
rear wheels to slide and your vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of
vehicle control.
Understanding the Shift Positions of
your Automatic Transmission
E209112
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired
gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Manual (M)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), you
can change gears up or down as desired by
using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™
transmission later in this section.
169
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1)
• Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into first (1) gear at high
speeds; allows for first (1) gear when
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Tow/Haul Mode
WARNING
Do not use the tow/haul feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as
the increased engine braking can cause the
rear wheels to slide and your vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of
vehicle control.
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever once.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
The tow/haul feature:
• Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which will slow your vehicle and
assist you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided will vary
based upon the amount the brake pedal
is pressed.
The tow/haul feature improves transmission
operation when towing a trailer or a heavy
load. All transmission gear ranges are
available when using tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return
to normal driving mode, press the button on
the gearshift lever twice. The TOW HAUL
light will deactivate. Tow/haul will also
deactivate when you power down your
vehicle.
Forced Downshifts
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of
your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission
may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This
operation is considered normal and will not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
170
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
SelectShift™ Automatic Transmission (If
Equipped)
This feature gives you the ability to change
gears up or down as desired.
As long as the engine speed does not
exceed the maximum allowable limit you can
downshift. SelectShift automatically
downshifts at low engine speeds in order to
prevent engine stalls.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit, unless the accelerator pedal is at full
travel. Take notice of the shift indicator lamp,
which alerts you when to shift to make sure
you achieve the highest level of efficiency
and fuel economy.
Press the + toggle switch on the side of the
gearshift lever to activate SelectShift.
• Press the (+) button to upshift.
• Press the (-) button to downshift.
E142629
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
Progressive Range Selection (PRS)
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with an
improved driving experience (for example,
in slippery conditions or when experiencing
a steep grade).
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press the
– button to active PRS. The available and
selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
All available gears will display with the
current gear indicated. Press the – button
again to lock out gears beginning with the
highest gear. Example: press the – button
twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only the
available gears will display and the
transmission will automatically shift between
the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears to allow the transmission to
shift to higher gears. The transmission will
shift automatically within the gear range you
select.
Manual (M)
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual (M)
position will allow you to manually select the
gear you desire. Only the current gear will
display. Use the buttons on the gearshift
lever to manually select gears. Press the +
button to upshift or the – button to downshift.
Return the transmission to a different
gearshift position to deactivate manual
control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
171
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 – 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 – 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 – 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 – 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 – 6
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park (P)
which means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always
fully set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate.
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the ignition
is in the on position and the brake pedal is
not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of
park (P) position with the ignition in the on
position and the brake pedal pressed, a
malfunction may have occurred. It is possible
that a fuse has blown or your vehicle’ s brake
lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 246).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps
are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the ignition
key to the off position, then remove the
key.
172
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
E206119
2. Starting at the rear of the trim panel,
using a screwdriver (or similar tool),
carefully pry up the trim panel from the
rear attachments and disconnect it from
the console to expose the inside of the
gearshift.
E206120
3. Locate the brake shift interlock lever on
the passenger side of the shifter
assembly.
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press and
hold the brake shift interlock lever while
pulling the gearshift lever out of park (P)
and into neutral (N).
5. Install the trim panel.
6. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle,
and release the parking brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as this
procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
173
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING
For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle,
see General Information in the Wheels and
Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4X4 mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces.
Your four-wheel drive vehicle features the
heavy-duty Control Trac® 4WD system. This
unique system is interactive with the road,
continually monitoring and adjusting torque
delivery to the front and rear wheels to
optimize vehicle control.
4WD Indicator Lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the
information display in the reconfigurable
telltale (RTT) location under the following
conditions. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 98).
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.
4X2
E163173
Momentarily illuminates when 4X2
is selected.
4X4 AUTO
E181781
Continuously illuminates when 4X4
AUTO is selected.
4X4
E207351
Continuously illuminates when 4X4
is selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
4WD Switch Positions
WARNING
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles
are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles.
174
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: The AdvanceTrac® with RSC® stability
enhancement system can be turned off
manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac
button. See Using Traction Control (page
185). This will disable the engine
management feature, allowing the vehicle
to maintain full power and enhanced
momentum through the obstacle.
Note: The Control Trac® selector switch
should not be changed while the rear wheels
are slipping.
E207352
The Control Trac® system functions in three
modes:
• 4X2 delivers power to the rear wheels
only. The information display will
momentarily display 4x2 when this mode
is selected. This mode is appropriate for
normal on-road driving on dry pavement
and provides the best fuel economy.
• 4X4 AUTO provides electronic control
four-wheel drive with power delivered to
all four wheels, as required, for increased
traction. The information display will
display 4A when this mode is selected.
This mode is appropriate for all on-road
driving conditions, such as dry road
surfaces, wet pavement, snow, or gravel.
• 4X4 provides electronically locked
four-wheel drive power to front and rear
wheels. The information display will
display 4X4 when this mode is selected.
This mode is not recommended for use
on dry pavement. This mode is only
intended for severe winter or off-road
conditions, such as deep snow, ice or
shallow sand.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays will improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Press any button (4X2, 4X4 AUTO or 4X4) at
a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating a
4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
complete the information display will then
display the system mode selected.
175
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity
such as utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles handle differently than vehicles with
a lower center of gravity. Utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
could result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or damaging
underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times,
especially in rough terrain. Since sudden
changes in terrain can result in abrupt
steering wheel motion, make sure you grip
the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the area.
To maintain steering and braking control of
your vehicle, you must have all four wheels
on the ground and they must be rolling, not
sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a
front air dam that can become damaged
(due to reduced ground clearance) when
taking your vehicle off-road. This air dam
can be taken off by removing two bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off
the road.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through
a transfer case. On Four-wheel drive
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to
select different 4WD modes when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures can be found in this
chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance chapter. You should become
thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
176
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you
to drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Basic Operating Principles
• Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4X4
mode is only intended for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been reduced
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the
road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than attempt
a sudden return to the road which could
cause your vehicle to slide sideways out of
control or roll over. Remember, your safety
and the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure
a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute, damage to the transmission and
tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle
(i.e. turn the steering wheel only as rapidly
and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
177
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration
and braking. This could result in an increased
risk of vehicle roll over, loss of vehicle control
and personal injury. Use all available road
surface to bring your vehicle to a safe
direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of surface
to another (i.e. from concrete to gravel) there
will be a change in the way your vehicle
responds to a maneuver (i.e. steering,
acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid excessive wheel slip.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck to
the point that assistance may be required
from another vehicle. Remember, you may
be able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in
slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle
are submerged in water, their fluids should
be checked and changed, if necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
the axle lubricant should be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
E143950
178
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly”.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn around
because this could cause vehicle roll over.
It is better to reverse back to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral. Disengage overdrive
or move the transmission selector lever to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose
control. The front wheels have to be turning
in order to steer your vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the
brakes steadily. Do not pump the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
179
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
will not stop any faster as braking occurs at
all four wheels. Do not become
overconfident in any road condition.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Do not pump the brake pedal. See Hints on
Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 182).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty. For this reason, we strongly
recommend that you do not make
modifications such as adding or removing
parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle to
roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect you and
your passenger's safety. We recommend you
frequently inspect your vehicle's chassis
components when your vehicle is subject to
off road usage.
180
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
This axle provides added traction on slippery
surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on
a poor traction surface. Under normal
conditions, the limited-slip axle functions like
a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit a
slight noise or vibration during tight turns
with low vehicle speed. This is normal
behavior and indicates the axle is working.
181
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels
(page 292).
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 98).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal,
and can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated after you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
182
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is placed
in park (P). Failure to set the parking brake
and engage park could result in vehicle
roll-away, property damage or bodily injury.
Turn the ignition to the lock position and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
Apply the parking brake whenever your
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal downward
to set the parking brake. The brake warning
lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate
and remains illuminated until the parking
brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever
located at the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or
with a trailer, press and hold the brake pedal
down, then set the parking brake. There may
be a little vehicle movement as the parking
brake sets to hold the vehicle's weight. This
is normal and should be no reason for
concern. If needed, press and hold the
service brake pedal down, then try
reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake and
shift the transmission into park (P) (automatic
transmission) or first gear (1) (manual
transmission).
You must remain in your vehicle once
you have activated the system.
During all times, you are responsible
for controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the system
will be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
183
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The
brakes release automatically when the
engine has sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the grade. This is
an advantage when pulling away on a slope,
for example from a car park ramp, traffic
lights or when reversing uphill into a parking
space.
The system will activate automatically on any
slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature off
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 102). The system
will remain on or off depending on how it
was last set.
Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed
and select an uphill gear (for example,
first (1) when facing uphill or reverse (R)
when facing downhill).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain on
the slope without rolling away for about
two or three seconds. This hold time will
automatically be extended if you are in
the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display. See
General Information (page 102). The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display, you
cannot turn the system on or off. When you
switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on.
184
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily if the system
detects a failure. Make sure you did not
manually disable the traction control system
using the switch. If the stability control and
traction control light is still illuminating
steadily, have the system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Operating
your vehicle with traction control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
E166706
The switch for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, a message
and an illuminated icon appear on the
instrument cluster.
Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See Principle of
Operation (page 54).
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes:
185
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
• When a driving condition activates either
of the systems.
• If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on:
• When you switch the traction control
system off.
• When you select an alternative stability
control mode.
186
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability control
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNINGS
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your electronic stability
control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability control
or the traction control system, you may
experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction control
systems do not enhance your vehicle's
ability to maintain traction of the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the system applies higher
brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
187
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 185).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Stability Control and Traction Control
with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically activates when you
start your engine. You can switch off the
electronic stability control and roll stability
control portions of the system below 35 mph
(56 km/h). When the transmission is in
reverse (R), they are disabled. You can switch
off the traction control portion of the system
independently. See Using Traction Control
(page 185).
188
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
Traction control systemElectronic stability controlRoll stability controlStability control OFF lightButton functions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated during bulb
check
Default at start-up
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedButton pressed moment-
arily
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledFlashes then illuminated
solid
2
Button pressed and held
for more than 5 seconds at
vehicle speed under 35
mph (56 km/h)
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedVehicle speed exceeds 35
mph (56 km/h) after button
is pressed and held for
more than 5 seconds
189
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed again after
deactivation
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledIlluminatedButton not pressed and the
transfer case is switched
to 4WD Low
3
1
The traction control system may still be enabled but with higher entry thresholds compared to the full system. The electronic stability control
entry thresholds are higher compared to the full system.
2
When you press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds the indicator lamp blinks for three seconds.
3
Your vehicle may or may not have this feature available. When you select 4WD low the stability control light illuminates and all stability control
with RSC features are disabled.
4
Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled. Single wheel spin traction control is always enabled.
190
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
USING HILL DESCENT CONTROL
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or extremely
steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver
assist system and cannot substitute for good
judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may
result in loss of vehicle control, crash or
serious injury.
Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at 0 mph (0 km/h). When
stopped, the parking brake must be applied
or the vehicle must be placed in park (P) or
it may roll away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set or
maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling down
interval after sustained use. The amount of
time that the feature can remain active
before cooling varies with conditions. The
system provides a warning in the message
center and a chime sounds when the system
is about to disengage for cooling. At this
time, manually apply the brakes to maintain
descent speed.
Using Hill Descent Control
Press and release the hill descent
button in the center of the terrain
management control. The button
illuminates and a chime sounds when you
switch this feature on.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the desired
speed. To decrease descent speed, press
the brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen vehicle
speed.
Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
191
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
Hill Descent Modes
DescriptionInformation Display Message
Displays at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h) when you press the Hill
Descent Control and Hill Descent Control activates.
Hill Descent Control Active
Displays at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h) when you press the Hill
Descent Control switch and conditions are not correct for hill descent
activation.
Hill Descent Control Ready
Displays at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) when you press the Hill
Descent Control switch.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed 20MPH or Less
Displays when you press the Hill Descent Control switch and the
vehicles is in park (P) or neutral (N).
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 108).
192
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain
objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid
systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent
lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and
external motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
WARNINGS
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a warning
to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging your
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create
false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 54).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear
sensing system may detect that add-on
device and therefore provide warnings. It is
suggested that you disable the rear sensing
system when you attach an add-on device
to your vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
E139213
You can turn the system on or off
by pressing the parking aid button.
If your vehicle does not have a
parking aid button, the system can be
switched off through the information display
menu or from the pop-up message that
appears once you shift the transmission into
reverse (R). See General Information (page
102).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 108).
193
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate
and move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed out.
FRONT PARKING AID
The front parking aid sensors automatically
turn on when you shift into reverse (R) or a
forward gear.
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and the vehicle speed is below
7 mph (12 km/h).
194
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. There is decreased
coverage area at the outer corners.
The system sounds an audible warning when
obstacles are near either bumper in the
following manner:
• Objects detected by the front sensors
are indicated by a high-pitched tone from
the front of the vehicle.
• Objects detected by the rear sensors are
indicated by a lower pitched tone from
the rear of the vehicle.
• The sensing system reports the obstacle
which is closest to the front or rear of the
vehicle. For example, if an obstacle is
12 in (30 cm) from the front of the vehicle
and, at the same time, an obstacle is only
6 in (15 cm) from the rear of the vehicle,
the lower pitched tone sounds.
• An alternating warning sounds from the
front and rear if there are objects at both
bumpers that are closer than 12 in
(30 cm).
The system provides warnings when your
vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is
stationary and the detected obstacle is less
than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in conjunction
with the interior and exterior mirrors for
maximum coverage.
WARNINGS
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the luggage compartment
door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
195
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
The system uses two types of guides to help
you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Note: The image may remain on
momentarily when you shift the transmission
out of reverse (R). If your vehicle speed
reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or 10 seconds
elapse and the image remains on, have your
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In some
vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once
you engage the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to damage
to the rear of your vehicle.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed
guidelines are on.
196
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E163914
A
E
D
C
B
Rear bumperA
Fixed guideline: Red ZoneB
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneC
Fixed guideline: Green zoneD
CenterlineE
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Camera System Settings
Rear view camera system settings can be
accessed through the multifunctional display.
See General Information (page 102).
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights which appear on top of the video
image when an object is detected by the
reverse sensing system. The alert highlights
the closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual
park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas
are still displayed.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle is not shown. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the
manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol on
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
197
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
198
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the road
surface is slippery. This could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning displays. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E208730
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator changes color in the instrument
cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
199
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the Information display
the set speed changes in approximately
2 km/h increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET +.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
200
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
Never use the Blind Spot Information
System as a replacement for using the
interior and exterior mirrors or looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. The
Blind Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft (3 m)
beyond the bumper. The system is designed
to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Cross Traffic Alert warns the driver of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 3 mph (5 km/h). It
remains on while the transmission is in drive
(D) or neutral (N). If shifted out of drive (D) or
neutral (N), the system enters Cross Traffic
Alert mode. Once shifted back into drive (D),
the Blind Spot Information System turns back
on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P)
or provide any additional warning when a
turn signal is on.
Cross Traffic Alert detects approaching
vehicles from up to 46 ft (14 m) away though
coverage decreases when the sensors are
blocked. Reversing slowly helps increase the
coverage area and effectiveness.
201
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
WARNING
Never use the Cross Traffic Alert
system as a replacement for using the
interior and exterior mirrors and looking over
your shoulder before backing out of a
parking space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142440
202
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
E142441
203
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert systems illuminate an amber alert
indicator in the outside mirror on the side of
your vehicle the approaching vehicle is
coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Cross Traffic Alert sounds also sounds an
audible alarm and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left. Cross Traffic
Alert works with the reverse sensing system
which sounds its own audible alarm. See
Rear Parking Aid (page 194).
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
Never use the Blind Spot Information
System as a replacement for using the
interior and exterior mirrors or looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. The
Blind Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning
with no blockage present; this is rare and
known as a false blockage warning. A false
blocked condition either self-corrects or
clears after a key cycle.
E205199
204
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow these areas
to become obstructed by mud, snow or
bumper stickers, as this can cause degraded
system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a blocked sensor
warning or low visibility warning will appear
in the information display and the alert
indicator illuminates in the appropriate
mirror(s). The information display warning
can be cleared but the alert indicator remains
illuminated.
When the blockage is removed, the system
can be reset in two ways: 1) when at least
two objects are detected while driving, or 2)
turn the ignition key from on to off, then back
on. If the blockage is still present after the
key cycle, the system senses again that it is
blocked after driving in traffic.
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in front of the radar or remove the obstruction.The radar surface is dirty or obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to allow the radar to detect
passing vehicles so it can clear the blocked state.
The radar surface is not dirty or obstructed
No action required. The system automatically resets to an unblocked
state once the rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or stops. Do not use
the Blind Spot Information System or Cross Traffic Alert in these
conditions.
Heavy rainfall/snowfall interferes with the radar signals
System Limitations
The Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert systems do have their limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
205
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The following are other situations that may
limit the Blind Spot Information System:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering
and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a convoy
pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If you connected a trailer to your
vehicle, the Blind Spot Information System
may detect the trailer causing a false alert.
To avoid false alerts you may want to turn
the system off manually.
There may be certain instances when either
the Blind Spot Information or Cross Traffic
Alert systems illuminate the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone; this is
known as a false alert. Some amount of false
alerts are normal; they are temporary and
self-correct.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the left
or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and
a message will appear in the information
display. See Information Messages (page
108).
Switching the System Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off
temporarily by using the information display
control; See Information Displays (page 102).
. When you switch off the Blind Spot
Information System, you will not receive
alerts and the information display will display
a system off message. The yellow alert
indicator in the outside mirror will also flash
twice. The system switches back on
whenever you switch the ignition on.
You can also have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off
permanently, the system can only be
switched back on at an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a
message displays in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and watch
the information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
206
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
If the system detects an error, you may
not feel a difference in the steering,
however a serious condition may exist.
Obtain immediate service from an authorized
dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of
steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
DRIVE CONTROL
Driver Select Suspension (If Equipped)
Driver select suspension delivers a unique
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering and handling.
Driver select suspension consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions,
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
207
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The configuration remains active until
modified from the main menu on the
information display. See General
Information (page 102).
Modes:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from your vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs. Sport mode is ideal for use
during more spirited driving.
SELF-LEVELING SUSPENSION
The self-leveling suspension system is
designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
• Certain road conditions
• Steering maneuvers
• Braking
• Acceleration
• Towing
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle
at a constant level through a hydraulic pump
inside each rear shock. Depending on the
payload or road surface conditions it will take
approximately 2 mi (3.2 km) for the leveling
to complete.
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for
approximately 12 hours, the leveling system
may bleed down to a lower height. This can
be especially apparent if a trailer is left
attached to the parked vehicle for long
periods of time. You must drive your vehicle
in order to re-level the suspension.
If a self-equalizing hitch is used, your vehicle
should be driven approximately 2 mi (3.2 km)
with the trailer prior to adjusting (leveling)
the hitch.
208
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
Cargo Management System
E205355
A storage compartment is located in the floor
of the rear cargo area.
Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
To close, lower the cover and press down
on the handle until the latch clicks.
Cargo Shelf and Divider (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not load any objects on the shelf
that may obstruct your vision or strike
occupants of the vehicle in the case of a
sudden stop or collision.
Do not place people or pets on or
under the parcel shelf.
Note: Do not put more than 30 lb (14 kg) on
shelf.
The cargo shelf and divider is located behind
the rear seat of your vehicle and has two
positions:
• A flat shelf, which pivots up and snaps
into place.
• A divider, which pivots up and snaps
vertically into place.
To move the shelf to the shelf position:
E205356
Pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels
on the side trim panels and snap the shelf
ends in the channels.
209
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
To move the shelf to the divider position:
E205357
Pull up and pivot the shelf over the channels
on the side trim panels and snap vertically
in place.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low center of
gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers
of gravity, may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the crossbars, is 200 lb
(90 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars affixed
to the roof rack side rails. When using the
roof rack system, we recommend you use
Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed
specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
Adjusting the Crossbar
E142448
1. Loosen the thumbwheels at both ends
of the crossbar by turning them
counterclockwise (both crossbars are
adjustable).
2. Slide the crossbar to the desired location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheels at both ends
of the crossbar by turning them
clockwise.
210
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels
are tight each time you add or remove load
from the roof rack, and periodically while
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section guides you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both.
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within
its design rating capability, with or
without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before you
load your vehicle, become familiar with
the following terms for determining your
vehicle’s weight rating, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
211
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Payload
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combined weight of cargo
and passengers that your vehicle is
carrying. The maximum payload for your
vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading
label. The label is either on the B-pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and Canada
may not have a tire and loading label.
Look for “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for
maximum payload. The payload listed
on the Tire and Loading Information
label is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If
you install any additional equipment on
your vehicle, you must determine the
new payload. Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire and Loading label. When towing,
trailer tongue weight or king pin weight
is also part of payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
212
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight
that a single axle (front or rear) can carry.
These numbers are on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes
all options, equipment, passengers and
cargo. It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the
highest possible weight of a fully loaded
trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer
Towing Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed information.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the vehicle and the loaded trailer,
including all cargo and passengers, that
the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated for
operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle.
213
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
The gross combined weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to your vehicle,
personal injury or both.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
214
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
front or the rear gross axle weight rating
specified for your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Take extra precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
215
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label. See Recommended Towing
Weights (page 217).
Your vehicle may have electrical items,
such as fuses or relays, related to
towing. See Fuses (page 246).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in
another chapter of this manual. See
Load Limit (page 211).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
216
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature except
in situations where speed reduction may be
detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver
has significant trailer towing experience, and
can control trailer sway and maintain safe
operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple times,
gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED
appears in the information display. The first
thing to do is slow your vehicle down, then
pull safely to the side of the road and check
for proper tongue load and trailer load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page 209).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed 36.5 feet² (3.39 meters²) if your
vehicle is equipped with the standard
towing package, or 60 feet² (5.57
meters²) if your vehicle is equipped with
the optional heavy duty package.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may
significantly reduce the performance of
your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer
with a low aerodynamic drag and
rounded front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting
at the 1000 foot (300 meter) elevation
point.
217
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided
the maximum trailer weight is less than
or equal to the maximum trailer weight
listed for your vehicle configuration on
the following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer
weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight
rating for your vehicle model and
axle ratio. See the following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following that
apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such as a
draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures
into the payload for your vehicle.
Reduce the total payload by the final
trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not
sure.
218
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Maximum GCWRTowing PackageVehicle Type
12300 lb (5579 kg)
Standard
Two-wheel drive (except L)
12600 lb (5715 kg)Two-wheel drive L
12500 lb (5669 kg)Four-wheel drive (except L)
12800 lb (5806 kg)Four-wheel drive L
15100 lb (6849 kg)
Optional Heavy Duty
Two-wheel drive (except L)
14900 lb (6758 kg)Two-wheel drive L
15100 lb (6849 kg)Four-wheel drive (except L)
14900 lb (6758 kg)Four-wheel drive L
219
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 211).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles
with a Trailer Towing Package and
7–Pin Connector)
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop lampGreen
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
Trailer Hitch Cover
Your vehicle is equipped with a removable
trailer hitch trim cover. To remove the trim
cover:
220
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
E208902
Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners in the
bottom of the cover by turning them
counterclockwise. Pull the cover downward
to remove it. The fasteners remain attached
to the cover.
E208903
To reinstall the cover, insert the four plastic
tabs on top of the cover into the
corresponding slots, as shown in the
illustration and push the cover up into the
bumper trim.
Hold the cover against the bumper trim and
reinstall the two quarter-turn fasteners by
turning them clockwise.
Hitches
WARNING
The trailer hitch on this vehicle is part
of the vehicle rear crash safety
structure. Do not remove the trailer hitch.
Failure to follow this warning could
compromise vehicle crash structure and
increase the risk of injury in a rear end crash.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Integrated Hitch Rating
WARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
tongue weight exceeds the limit of the
towing system and could result in vehicle
structural damage, loss of vehicle control
and personal injury.
221
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings
depending on mode of operation:
• Weight-carrying mode requires a draw
bar and hitch ball. The draw bar supports
all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight-distributing mode requires an
aftermarket weight-distributing system,
which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring
bars and snap-up brackets. This system
distributes the vertical tongue load of the
trailer between the truck and the trailer.
Maximum Tongue WeightMaximum Trailer WeightMode
600 lb (272 kg)6000 lb (2722 kg)Weight carrying
900 lb (408 kg)9000 lb (4082 kg)Weight distributing
Note: These are hitch ratings only. Actual
vehicle ratings are dependent on engine,
transmission and axle combinations.
Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles without
Automatic Leveling Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was
before attaching the trailer. Doing so will
defeat the function of the weight-distributing
hitch, which may cause unpredictable
handling, and could result in serious personal
injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
222
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the height
of your vehicle's front wheel opening on
the fender is approximately half the way
down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose down
toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles with
Automatic Leveling Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was
before attaching the trailer. Doing so will
defeat the function of the weight-distributing
hitch, which may cause unpredictable
handling, and could result in serious personal
injury.
Note: If you do not move the loaded vehicle
for approximately 12 hours, the leveling
system may bleed down to a lower height.
This can be especially apparent if you leave
a trailer attached to the parked vehicle for
long periods. You must drive your vehicle in
order to re-level the suspension.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Load the interior of the vehicle to a
weight similar to that which you intend
to carry when towing. This includes
things such as passenger weight and
cargo.
2. Drive the vehicle for approximately 2
miles (3 kilometers) to re-level the
suspension.
3. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
5. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
6. Make sure you securely attach and lock
the trailer tongue to the hitch.
7. Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
8. Drive the vehicle and trailer at 20–25
mph (32–40 km/h) for approximately 2
miles (3 kilometers) to re-level the
suspension.
223
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
9. Park your vehicle and trailer on a level
surface.
10. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
11. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
12. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
remove the trailer, adjust the ball height
accordingly and repeat Steps 5-11.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose down
toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of
having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500
pounds (680 kilograms) when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system resulting
in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible for assistance in proper
trailer tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
224
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system may
turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
Continuous Controlled Damping
Suspension (CCD Suspension), you can
select NORMAL or SPORT drive control
modes for better experience while towing
a trailer. See Information Displays (page
102).
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the gross
combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear
lubricant (if the axle is not already filled
with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328).
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
225
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
“temporary” spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type (All-Season
or All-Terrain) or is from a different
manufacturer than the road tires on your
vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations
when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the
rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or
changed unless a leak is suspected or other
axle repair is required.
TOWING POINTS
WARNINGS
Using recovery hooks is dangerous
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety
practices. Improper use of recovery hooks
may cause hook failure or separation from
the vehicle and could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNINGS
Always slowly remove the slack from
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce significantly
higher loads which can cause the recovery
hooks to break off, or the recovery strap to
fail which can cause serious injury or death.
Never link two straps together with a
clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
could become projectiles if the strap breaks
and can cause serious injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks. These
hooks should never have a load applied to
them greater than the gross vehicle weight
rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are secure
and capable of withstanding the applied
load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
226
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to three
times the gross vehicle weight of the
stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet draped
over the recovery strap to help absorb
the energy in the event the strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded
heavier than its gross vehicle weight
rating specified on the certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the
length of the recovery strap. This helps
avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery
hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle
lurching into their path.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being towed.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 169).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
227
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and cause the
engine to shut down completely.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position, the
engine is overheating. See Gauges (page
96).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. The
engine will continue to operate with limited
power for a short time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce. The
air conditioning will switch off and the engine
cooling fan will operate continually.
1. Reduce your speed gradually and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Switch the engine off immediately to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 268).
5. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
228
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats
that are firmly secured to retention posts so
that they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
229
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied with
your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly
secured to both retention posts to make sure
mats do not shift out of position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals
or the ability to control the vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not
another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can
become trapped under the pedals causing
a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with pedal
operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
230
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 68,351 mi (110,000 km)
(whichever comes first) within the
extended powertrain warranty coverage
period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of
diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 98 ft (30 m)
of a paved or county maintained road,
no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 99 mi (160 km) of
the disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a tow
to a selling or preferred dealer that is
more than 99 mi (160 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 99 mi (160 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is not,
then the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within 99 mi
(160 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Lincoln Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
231
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-5333.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your wallet
for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove compartment of your
vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
review your warranty guide, contact your
dealer, call us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333,
or visit our website at
www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
fuel system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to
the engine. Not every impact will cause a
shutoff.
232
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch
off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
233
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+) terminal of
your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow
through and cause damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
234
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
235
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service, or if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Lincoln
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other
means.
Lincoln Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Due to local market requirements in some
countries, some vehicles may be equipped
with a recovery hook.
Recovery Hook Location
If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in
recovery hook, it is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor cover.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
recovery hook, you can purchase one from
your dealer.
236
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Installing the Recovery Hook
There is an installation point for the recovery
hook located behind the fascia.
Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a
left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to
install it. Make sure that the recovery hook
is fully tightened.
E146284
Insert a suitable object to pry open the cover
(1). Use the recessed (notched) portion of the
cover. Screw in the recovery hook (2).
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels
Switch the ignition to the on position. Failure
to do so results in steering lock and
non-function of indicator and brake lamps.
Braking and steering efforts are high if the
engine is not running. Maintain increased
stopping distances.
237
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line provides warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made
using Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln Motor Company
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
238
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln Motor Company policies,
please contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
239
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
240
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
241
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the United
States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
242
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company by emailing [email protected].
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
243
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-index-76.htm (English)Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-index-76.htm (French)Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
244
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
245
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle’s main
electrical systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 275).
E166589
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
246
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Rear washer relay.Relay1
Starter relay.Relay2
Blower motor relay.Relay3
Rear wiper relay.Relay4
Fuel pump relay.Relay5
Electronic cooling fan.Relay6
Rear window defroster.Relay7
Heated mirror relay.
Electronic cooling fan.Relay8
Run/start relay.Relay9
Power distribution box relay.Relay10
Power running boards.40A*11
Heated seats.
Run/start relay.40A*12
Starter relay.30A*13
Electronic cooling fan.50A*14
247
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
RH HID headlamp.20A*15
Electronic fan.50A*16
LH HID headlamp.20A*17
Trailer brake.30A*18
Power point (console).20A*19
Not used.—20
Trailer tow module.30A*21
Passenger power seat.30A*22
Air conditioner clutch relay.Relay23
Trailer tow park lamp relay.Relay24
Not used.—25
ALT sensor.10A**26
4x4 all wheel drive module.20A**27
Trailer tow park lamp relay.25A**28
Integrated wheel end solenoid.10A**29
Air conditioner clutch relay.10A**30
248
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Trailer tow back up lamp.15A**31
Blower motor relay.40A*32
110-volt AC power point.40A*33
Auxiliary blower motor.30A*34
Powertrain control module relay.50A*35
Power liftgate.30A*36
Not used.—37
Not used.—38
Trailer tow backup lamps relay.Relay39
Electronic fan 2 relay.Relay40
Powertrain control module keep-alive power.10A**41
Run/start relay.5A**42
Brake on/off switch.10A**43
Fuel pump relay.20A**44
Not used (spare).10A**45
Front/rear washer pump.15A**46
249
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Rear wiper motor.30A*47
Trailer tow module.40A*48
Not used.—49
Front wiper motor relay.30A*50
Rear window defroster and heated mirror relay.40A*51
Anti-lock brake system run/start feed.10A**52
Powertrain control module ISP.5A**53
Power steering.5A**54
Headlamp control module.15A**55
Passenger compartment fuse panel run/start feed.30A**56
Blower motor run/start.5A**57
Not used.—58
Heated mirrors.15A**59
Not used.—60
Not used.—61
Not used.—62
250
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Electronic fan.25A*63
Moonroof.30A*64
Auxiliary power point (instrument panel valance panel).20A*65
Auxiliary power point (rear of center console).20A*66
Front row climate controlled seats.40A*67
Anti-lock brake system valves.30A*68
Anti-lock brake system pump.60A*69
Third row power fold seat.30A*70
Auxiliary power point/cigar lighter.20A*71
Auxiliary power point (right rear quarter panel).20A*72
Rear seat climate module.20A*73
Driver power seat.30A*74
Vehicle power 1 – powertrain control module.25A**75
Vehicle power 2 – powertrain control module.20A**76
Vehicle power 4 – ignition coils.20A**77
Not used.—78
251
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Vehicle power 3 – powertrain control module.15A**79
Not used.—80
Not used.—81
Rain sensor.5A**82
Not used.—83
Not used.—84
Wiper motor relay.Relay85
*Cartridge fuses.
**Mini fuses.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
right-hand side of the instrument panel.
252
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E205347
To remove the trim panel for access to the
fuse box, pull the panel toward you and
swing it out away from the side and remove
it. To reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it shut.
253
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E163102
The fuses are coded as follows:
254
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Driver window.30A1
Rear seat control.15A2
Multimedia gateway module.
Passenger window.30A3
Demand lamps.10A4
Amplifier.20A5
Rear electronic automatic temperature control.5A6
Power mirror.7.5A7
Driver seat memory switch.
Not used.—8
SYNC.10A9
Power lift gate.
Electric finish panel.
Display.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Passive entry/start module.10A11
Interior lighting.15A12
Puddle lamps.
255
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Right turn and stop/turn signals.15A13
Left turn and stop/turn signals.15A14
Reverse lamp.15A15
Center high mount stop lamp.
EC mirror.
Right front low beam.10A16
Left front low beam.10A17
Brake shift interlock/start button LED/keypad illumination.10A18
Third row power folding seat.
Passive entry touch start.
Subwoofer amplifier.20A19
THX amplifier.
Lock/unlock relays.20A20
Not used.—21
Horn.20A22
Steering wheel control module.15A23
Cluster.
Adjustable pedals/power adjustable column.15A24
Datalink.
256
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Liftgate release decklid.15A25
Liftglass release motor.
Push to start switch.5A26
Passive entry/start module.20A27
Ignition switch.15A28
Key inhibit switch.
Radio.20A29
GPS.
Front park lamps.15A30
Trailer brake on/off.5A31
Power vent.15A32
Front windows motor.
Power inverter.
CCD suspension module.10A33
Rear park assist.10A34
Rear camera.
BLIS.
Heated seat.
Climate module.5A35
257
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
O/D switch.
Not used.—36
4X4 module.10A37
EC mirror.10A38
Moonroof.
DVD.
Left and right front high beams.15A39
Rear park/tail lamps.10A40
Restraints control module.7.5A41
Not used.—42
Not used.—43
Not used.—44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control.10A46
Not used.—47
Front passenger and rear windows circuit breaker.30A48
Windows and vents relay.Relay49
258
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating
can cause severe wire damage and could
start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
259
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
260
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse TypeCallout
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
261
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
262
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E203008
1
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and locate
the secondary release lever under the
front of the hood on the left-hand side.
Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever toward the
center of your vehicle.
E189028
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold
it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make sure
that it is closed properly and fully latched.
263
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
A
A
B D E F
C
GH
E166496
264
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 274).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 275).B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 266).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 266).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 273).E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 268).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 283).G.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 246).H.
265
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
Checking the engine oil level too soon
after you switch the engine off may result
in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 262).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood
Overview (page 264).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again
to check the oil level. See Engine Oil
Dipstick (page 266).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If the
oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil
immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 332).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,100 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING
Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
266
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 264). Turn
it counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 332). You may have
to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
267
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, spilling coolant on
hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure. Steam
and hot liquid can come out forcefully when
you loosen the cap slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at the
intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 456).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Coolant concentration should be checked
using a refractometer. We do not recommend
the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips
for measuring coolant concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
reservoir or windshield washer fluid in the
engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
268
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted coolant
approved to the correct specification in order
to avoid plugging the small passageways in
the engine cooling system. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 328). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or
cooling system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 328).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to Ford
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to the
correct specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach
the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. Operating an
engine with a low level of coolant can result
in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Note: In case of emergency, you can add a
large amount of water without coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location.
Water alone, without coolant, can cause
engine damage from corrosion, overheating
or freezing. When you reach a service
location, you must have the cooling system
drained and refilled with prediluted coolant
approved to the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 328).
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
269
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process is
not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection.
Coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the coolant and may
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the coolant
and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the
scheduled maintenance information, the
coolant should be changed. Add prediluted
coolant approved to the correct specification.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
328).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient temperature,
vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and a
message may appear in the
information display.
270
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates,
however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle has limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle does not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine may
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend that
you contact your roadside assistance
service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
271
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not be able
to accelerate with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach higher a
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long or
steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power. In order
to manage the engine coolant temperature.
Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on vehicle loading, grade and
ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is
no need to pull off the road. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
The air conditioning may automatically turn
on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant temperature
decreases to the normal operating
temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully
into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine soon
messages appear in your information display,
do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature does
not drop, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the
engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 456).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
272
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID CHECK (If
Equipped)
E170444
3
1. Clean the area around the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.20 in (5mm) from the
bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler opening. Fill
to the bottom of the opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
328).
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid
could result in the loss of vehicle control,
serious personal injury or death.
273
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage or failure.
Failure to adhere to this warning could result
in the loss of vehicle control, serious
personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty of
water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to add
fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating
range could compromise the performance
of the system. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
328).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 328).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
274
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
This vehicle may be fitted with more
than one battery. Removing the battery
cables from only one battery does not
disconnect your vehicle electrical system.
Make sure you disconnect the battery cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious personal
injury or property damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery,
make sure you reinstall the battery cover or
shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
275
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer, some
control conditions are maintained by power
from the battery. When the battery is
disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim
strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV)
must also relearn the ethanol content of the
fuel for optimum driveability and
performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 339). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 90). Reset the radio station
presets. See Audio System (page 339).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the battery
cables to maintain battery charge for quick
starting.
Battery Management System (If Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery drain
is detected, the system temporarily disables
some electrical systems to protect the
battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. These messages are only
for notification that an action is taking place,
and not intended to indicate an electrical
problem or that the battery requires
replacement.
276
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
After battery replacement, or in some cases
after charging the battery with an external
charger, the battery management system
requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to
relearn the battery state of charge. During
this time your vehicle must remain fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of
charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from
the glass.
277
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E205141
2
3
4
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
3. Press the wiper blade secondary locking
clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, contact an
authorized dealer to check and realign your
headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
278
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On the
wall or screen you will observe a light
pattern with a distinct horizontal edge
toward the right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, you will need
to adjust the beam so the edge is at the
same height as the horizontal reference
line.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver
to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before installing
it.
HID Headlamp Bulbs
Your vehicle has high intensity discharge
lamps. These lamps operate at a high
voltage. Contact an authorized dealer.
279
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
LED Lamps
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
Contact an authorized dealer.
The following lamps are LED:
• Front parking lamps.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Daytime running lamps.
• Front direction indicators.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Reversing lamps
Central High-mounted Brake Lamp
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
E205572
2. Remove the retaining bolts from the lamp
assembly.
E205573
3. Remove the lamp and unclip the bulb
holder.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
License Plate Lamp Bulbs
E205571
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
280
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with
an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and
an “E” for Europe to ensure lamp
performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not
damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality
bulb illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront direction indicator.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
HIDHIDHeadlamp low beam.
HIDHIDHeadlamp high beam.
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDWelcome lighting lamps.
LEDLEDRear lamp, brake lamp and rear direction indicator.
--W5WCentral high mounted brake lamp.
281
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDReversing lamps.
--168License plate lamp.
HID and LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
3.5194Glove compartment lamp.
--A6224PFVanity mirror lamp.
61600XBMap lamp.
61600XBSecond row lamp.
12211-2XBRear dome lamp.
LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
282
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not start
your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is
running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 329).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
456).
E163755
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor electrical
connector on the air outlet tube.
Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector.
E163756
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from below
for clarity), squeeze the connector and
pull it off of the air outlet tube.
E163757
3. Clean the area from around the air tube
to the air cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system. Next,
loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp so
the clamp is no longer snug to the air
tube. It is not necessary to completely
remove the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner
housing.
283
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E163758
5. Release the three clamps that secure the
cover to the air filter housing. Push the
air filter cover toward the center of the
vehicle and up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
7. Install the new air filter element.
E163759
8. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not to
crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing and cover and
ensure that you properly align the tabs
on the edge into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter housing
and tighten the air-tube clamp bolt
snugly. Do not over tighten air-tube
clamp bolt.
E163760
10. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position
(connector shown from below for
clarity).
284
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (U.S.)
Motorcraft Dissolvant de goudron et éliminateur d’insectes (Canada)
ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoyant pour métal brillant (Canada)
ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash (U.S.)
Shampooing superfin Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser
Engine Shampoo and Degreaser
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
Motorcraft Shampooing pour moteur (Canada)
CXC-66-A (Canada)
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoyant pour cuir et vinyle de haute qualité (Canada)
ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
Motorcraft Nettoyant multi-usage (Canada)
285
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S.)
Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoyant professionnel pour sellerie et moquette (Canada)
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover
Spot and Stain Remover
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoie-vitres de qualité supérieure (Canada)
ZC-23 (U.S.)
CXC-100 (Canada)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (U.S.)
Nettoyant pour roues et pneus Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
286
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’ s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle
pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's
surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
287
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from under
the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel
and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
288
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’ s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such
products could contaminate the side airbag
system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
291).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
289
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
290
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
291).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
291
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’ s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply
using manufacturer's instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
292
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
293
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
294
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your vehicle.
If you change the diameter of the tires from
that fitted at the factory, the speedometer
may not display the correct speed. Take your
vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer to have
the system reprogrammed. If you intend to
change the size of the wheels from that fitted
by the manufacturer, you can check the
suitability with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 298).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can also
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door last post; next to the
driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the way
your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least once
per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death from a rollover or other crash you
must avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for the
conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload or
improperly load your vehicle, and make sure
every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants
must wear seat belts and children/infants
must use appropriate restraints to minimize
the risk of injury or ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
295
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all four
wheels to power itself. This increases traction
which may enable you to safely drive over
terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through
a transfer case or power transfer unit.
Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select
different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel Drive
(page 174). For information on transfer case
maintenance, See Maintenance (page 262).
You should become thoroughly familiar with
this information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the initial
shift from two-wheel to four-wheel drive
while the vehicle is moving can cause a
momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not cause
for concern.
For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire of
a different size other than the tire provided
should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or
major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the four-wheel
drive system to stop functioning and default
to front-wheel drive. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 174).
296
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
297
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often will have a higher center of gravity and
a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
298
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half (1 ½) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
299
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-Metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) and for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
300
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
301
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number:
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
302
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label located
on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's
door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the
vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
303
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual; defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single; defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below:
304
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 209).
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting
in heat buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
305
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. Failure to follow the
tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to
change the ride characteristics of the
vehicle. If you do not maintain the
inflation pressure at the levels specified
by Ford, your vehicle may experience a
condition known as shimmy. Shimmy is
a severe vibration and oscillation in the
steering wheel after the vehicle travels
over a bump or dip in the road that does
not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may
result from significant under-inflation of
the tires, improper tires (load range, size,
or type), or vehicle modifications such
as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should slowly
reduce speed by either lifting off the
accelerator pedal or lightly applying the
brakes. The shimmy will cease as the
vehicle speed decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning
they are not hot from driving even a
mile.
306
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example, driven
more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never
bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge
onto the valve and measure the
pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare tires,
see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the
tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
307
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires
must be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear
bars, which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to one sixteenth of an inch
(2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNINGS
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions of
use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear or even if they have not been used.
However, heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high-load conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require you to replace tires more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has
not been used.
308
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended
tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon
WARNINGS
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect
the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
309
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel and
tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or
other tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels are not designed to be used
in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires; spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNINGS
Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
310
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re driving, the
wheels may be out of alignment. Have
an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension
may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows different tire
pressures for the front and rear
tires and the vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you need to
update the settings for the system
sensors. Always perform the system
reset procedure after tire rotation. If you
do not reset the system, it may not
provide a low tire pressure warning
when necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
it is intended for temporary use only and
should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front tires at
left of diagram)
311
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size, load
index and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire
or wheel not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased
risk of loss of control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. Additionally, the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels
can cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. Follow
the Ford recommended tire inflation pressure
found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch
post or the door edge that meets the door
latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need to
use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications)
be used, as cables may chip aluminum
wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an accessory
or equivalent. Other conventional link
type chains may contact and cause
damage to the vehicle's wheel house
and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front tires as
this may interfere with suspension
components.
312
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Only certain snow cables or chains have
been approved by Ford/Lincoln as safe
for use on your vehicle with the following
tires: 265/70R17 and 275/65R18.
• You should install snow cables or chains
that have been rated as SAE Class S.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the
chains do not touch any wiring, brake
lines, or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) or less
if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does not
work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no
longer needed. Do not use tire chains on
dry roads.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressures. You should periodically check
tire pressures using a pressure gauge.
Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
313
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
314
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light will turn
on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’ s recommended tire pressure.
Even if the light turns on and a short time
later turns off, your tire pressure still needs
to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
315
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire pressure monitoring system
malfunction
316
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, the system
must be retrained following every tire rotation. See Tire Care
(page 298).
Tire rotation without sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire pressure monitoring system
malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as being
significantly lower than the recommended
inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure.
317
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING
To determine the required pressure(s)
for your vehicle, see the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seat) or the Tire Label on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation on vehicles that require
different recommended tire pressures in the
front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front tires
as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated to
determine which set of tires are on the front
and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the system
reset procedure at least three feet (one
meter) away from another Ford Motor
Company vehicle undergoing the system
reset procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or the
system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels.
• A double horn will sound indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32
km/h) for at least two minutes, then park
in a safe location where you can easily
get to all four tires and have access to
an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with
the engine off.
318
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three
times. You must accomplish this within
10 seconds. If the reset mode has been
entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the system indicator will flash and
a message is shown in the information
display. If this does not occur, please try
again starting at Step 2. If after repeated
attempts to enter the reset mode, the
horn does not sound, the system
indicator does not flash and no message
is shown in the information display, seek
service from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system
sensors in the tires using the following
system reset sequence starting with the
left front tire in the following clockwise
order: Left front (driver's side front tire),
Right front (passenger's side front tire),
Right rear (passenger's side rear tire), Left
rear (driver's side rear tire).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has been learned
by the module for this position. If a double
horn is heard, the reset procedure was
unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
side rear tire), the system indicator stops
flashing, and a message is shown in the
information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must repeat
it. If after repeating the procedure and
two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance
from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver's door.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use
of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 313).
319
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the system
sensors See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 313). Replace the spare tire
with a road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the system
sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
320
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
jack handle and lug wrench are located in
the following locations:
LocationItem
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumperSpare tire
Under the access panel located in the floor compartment behind the
rear seat
Jack tools
321
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping
off the jack.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park (P), set
the parking brake and block (in both
directions) the wheel that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle)
to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If the vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else could
be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
WARNINGS
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one provided
as original equipment with your vehicle,
make sure the jack capacity is adequate for
the vehicle weight, including any vehicle
cargo or modifications.
Disable the power running boards
before jacking, lifting, or placing any
object under the vehicle. Never place your
hand between the power running board and
the vehicle as extended power running
boards will retract when the doors are
closed. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
when using the spare tire carrier could
cause loss of the wheel and tire and lead to
personal injury: Only use the spare tire carrier
to stow the tire and wheel combination
specified on the Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Other tire and
wheel combinations could cause the carrier
to fail if it does not fit securely or is too
heavy. Do not use impact tools or power
WARNINGS
tools operating over 200 RPM, which may
cause winch malfunction and prevent a
secure fit. Override the winch at least three
times (there will be an audible click each
time) to ensure a tight secure fit of the wheel
and tire.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.
Removing the Jack and Tools
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation
of the bag, because it will have to be
reinstalled after changing the tire.
1. Open the liftgate, then locate the access
panel on the floor behind the third row
seat. Unlatch and remove the panel.
322
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E208640
2. Remove the jack and tools assembly tray
from the compartment by turning the
wing-nut counterclockwise. Remove the
bag from the jack and tools assembly tray
by loosening the strap.
3. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench, jack
extension and handle from the plastic
tray.
4. Remove the hack from the tray assembly.
Removing the Spare Tire
1. Remove the jack handle and winch
extension from the tray and assemble
them.
2. Open the spare tire winch access plug
at the bottom of the compartment for the
jack and tools tray.
3. Insert the winch extension tool assembly
through the access hole in the floor and
engage the winch.
E208655
4. To remove the spare tire, turn the handle
counterclockwise until the tire is lowered
to the ground and the cable is slightly
slack.
5. Slide the retainer through the center of
the spare tire wheel and remove the
spare tire.
Jacking the Vehicle
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damaging your vehicle.
E208656
Front jacking point
323
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E208657
Rear jacking point
E175447
1. With the vehicle on level ground, block
both sides of the wheel diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the wheel being changed. Do
not jack the vehicle on a hill or incline.
2. Obtain the spare tire and jack tools from
their storage locations.
3. Use the tip of the jack handle to remove
any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
5. Position the jack according to the jack
locator arrows found on the frame and
turn the jack handle and extension tool
assembly clockwise.
6. Raise the vehicle to provide sufficient
ground clearance when installing the
spare tire, about 1/4 inch (6 millimeters).
7. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward.
2. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
3. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
4. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. See Technical
Specifications (page 326).
324
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear
of the vehicle, with the valve stem side
facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. If equipped, you may
have to remove the wheel center cap
prior to pushing the retainer through the
center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the jack tool
from the inner side of the wheel. Pull on
the cable to align the components at the
end of the cable.
3. Assemble the jack handle and winch
extension, then insert the winch
extension through the access hole
behind the third row seat and engage
the winch.
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the
tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench will
become harder to turn and the spare tire
winch will rachet or slip when the tire is
raised to maximum tightness. A clicking
sound will be heard from the winch
indicating that the tire is properly stowed.
5. Disassembly the jack tool and winch
extension and snap them back into the
tool tray.
6. Reinstall the jack bag properly around
the jack and tool assembly tray, making
sure the strap is fastened.
7. Close the access hole with the rubber
plug.
8. Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and
secure it with the wing nut.
325
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach the rotor to
the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle
control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).
326
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
327
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
3.5L EcoboostEngine
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
10.0:1Compression ratio
0.030 in (0.75 mm) - 0.033 in (0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
E167467
328
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FL-500-SOil filter.
BXT-65-750Battery.
SP-534Spark plugs.
FT-188Transmission filter.
WW-2234Windshield wiper blade.
WW-1612Rear window wiper blade.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet
or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 456).
329
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
330
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following
table shows the transmission code along
with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80E
331
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
18.5 qt (17.5 L)Engine coolant (Base radiator with auxiliary rear heat).
18.0 qt (17 L)Engine coolant (Heavy duty trailer towing with auxiliary rear heat).
Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid.
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle .
4.5 pt (2.1 L)
*
Rear axle.
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
**
Automatic transmission fluid.
1.6 qt (1.5 L) - 1.8 qt (1.7 L)Transfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift On the Fly).
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque On Demand).
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
332
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
28.0 gal (106 L)Fuel tank.
33.5 gal (126.8 L)Fuel tank (Navigator L).
44 oz (1.25 kg)A/C refrigerant.
40 oz (1.13 kg)A/C refrigerant (Navigator L).
7.1 fl oz (210 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
*
The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and it is considered lubricated for life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless
you suspect a leak or submerge the axle in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
**
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
333
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
334
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift On the Fly) (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
335
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Electronic Shift On the Fly) (Canada):
Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXL-12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque On Demand) (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Four Wheel Drive with Torque On Demand) (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
336
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
CRCSL3151ESBMulti-purpose grease:
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
337
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend DOT 4 Low Viscosity
(LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or
equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of
any fluid other than the recommended fluid
may cause degraded brake performance
and not meet the Ford performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
338
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in Ford
CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
339
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3 and
WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum number
of playable MP3 and WMA files may be
less depending on the structure of the
CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted
by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and
all folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode,
the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
340
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: The touchscreen system controls most
of the audio features. See SYNC
Supplement.
A B
CDE
F
E171512
341
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Press the control to eject a CD.B
TUNE: Turn the control to search manually through the radio frequency band. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, the system selects the previous or next channel. If you select a specific category (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
turn the TUNE control to find the previous or next channel in the selected category.
C
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press the control to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either
reverse or fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio bands in individual increments.
D
Volume: Turn the control to adjust the volume level on your system.E
Power: Press the control to switch the audio system on and off.F
Rear Seat Audio Controls
E182082
342
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
VOL: Adjust radio volume.A
MEDIA: Scroll through available audio system modes.B
Rear audio display: See displayed time, radio frequency, Sirius radio channel or CD track.C
CLOCK: Press to display the current time in 12-hour format. The time displays for a few seconds or you can press the CLOCK button
again to switch immediately back to the last media state.
D
SEEK: Select the next or previous stored radio frequency station, Sirius radio channel or CD track.E
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment
satellite radio channels. For more information
and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
343
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system
includes hardware and a limited subscription
term, which begins on the date of sale or
lease of your vehicle. See an authorized
dealer for availability.
344
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a complete list
of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and other
features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in
the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to
produce audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not clear shortly, or with
an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another
preset.
The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this
channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The process may take up
to three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
345
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
ActionConditionMessage
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are
either skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the channels available
for your vehicle.
Subscription Updated
346
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported).
MEDIA HUB
The media hub may be located on the
instrument panel or center console.
E207805
See your SYNC information.
347
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can simply
touch the item or option that you want to
select. The button changes color when you
select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
348
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E205444
349
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate
settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view.HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's
GPS location. See Settings (page 417).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside TemperatureD
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature.Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access to
all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment options.
Using the status and feature bar you can
quickly select the feature you want to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature
that allows you to access and control audio
features for 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off (and no doors open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status bar
depending on market, vehicle options and
current operation. If a feature is not active,
the icon does not display. Certain icons may
move to the left or right depending on what
options are active.
350
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E223130
351
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system.Driver TemperatureA
When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon
displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering
wheel.
Heated steering wheelB
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the
driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are
linked, the passenger's temperature does not display.
Passenger TemperatureC
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you.Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows
more details about the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming.RoamingI
This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone.Text MessageJ
352
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC.911 Assist OffK
The Bluetooth alert icon displays when there is an active Bluetooth alert.Bluetooth AlertL
This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth connection.BluetoothM
Messages may also appear in the status bar
to provide you with notifications. You can
select the message to view the associated
feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can
control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs,
and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within
the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook
of your connected device.
Phone
353
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get
driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along
your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone
or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped).
Apps
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or electric this is also where
your settings and power information is located.
You can customize your system with various settings for the touch-
screen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact
with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth
and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on what
is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of
your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar indicating
the status of the voice command session.
See Using Voice Recognition (page 367).
354
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some of
the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible the right
hand display (A).
355
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E208626
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3 screen:
356
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
InformationOption
Information for current audio playing.Audio
Select source.
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Navigation
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on
cluster level), and ability to cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown.
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *Phone
Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll callsQuick dial
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll through
the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
357
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling, not true direction (for example, if
the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of
the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and hold
to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or
switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject
an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be
combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK
PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE
ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 74).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
• Power: Switch the audio system on and
off.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system.
• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
advance through available media modes.
• SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 339).
358
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
• DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
• Temperature, fan and climate control
buttons: Control the temperature, fan
speed or settings of the climate control
system. See Climate Control (page 122).
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not dial
for help which could delay response time,
potentially increasing the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash. setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not dial for
help which could delay response time,
potentially increasing the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash.
WARNINGS
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it yourself.
Dial emergency services immediately to
avoid delayed response time which could
increase the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist
within five seconds of the crash, the system
or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone
which could prevent 911 Assist from working
properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
359
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains and
Roadside Emergencies sections of your
owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings (page
417).
To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell
phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the U.S., Canada or in a
territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers
for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone
sustains damage or loses its connection to
SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for
and try to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If
you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts
to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
360
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of the
fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not want to
disclose this information, do not switch the
feature on.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer check
your vehicle.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables out
of the way, so they do not interfere with
the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure
that you review your device's manual
before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
361
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
• Screens crowded with information, such
as Point of Interest reviews and ratings,
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link sports
scores, movie times or ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts or
recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active.
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
362
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Demo navigation route.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
• Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log into
your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to start
the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your use
of the system. Navigation updates cannot be
installed in the background, because the files
are too large.
363
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
To install the update in your vehicle, remove
anything that is plugged in the USB ports on
the media hub and plug in the USB drive
containing the update. When the USB drive
is plugged in, the installation should begin
immediately. After a successful installation,
the update is available the next time the
vehicle is started.
Please reference the website for any further
actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your Wi-
Fi network. You may have
to enter the security code if
the network is secured. The
system confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available Wi-
Fi Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature. If
you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 417). You can also perform a
master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting
(page 434).
If you would like to switch this feature on
later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system prompts
you to set up a Wi-Fi
connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your vehicle
off. The updates do not interrupt the normal
use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download
does not complete for any reason, the
364
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
download continues where it left off at the
next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon
activation of an update, a banner displays
on the touchscreen indicating the system
update. Select the icon to see more detail.
This icon displays for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection for
automatic updates to OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help
you with any questions you are not able to
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-521-4140.
Canada: 1-800-387-9333.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC
3, the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system. In
addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data
may be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless
you delete them and are generally accessible
only in your vehicle when the cellular phone
or media player is connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform a
Master Reset to erase all stored information.
You can find more information about the
Master Reset in General Settings. See
Settings (page 417). System data cannot be
accessed without special equipment and
access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. The
Lincoln Motor Company does not access the
system data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order, or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of The Lincoln Motor
Company.
365
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HOME SCREEN
E205446
366
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass.
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone
features also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting
state (On or Off), text messaging and roaming.
PhoneB
This map displays your current location or current route in real time.Navigation *C
When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time
and distance to your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information.
* If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays to
access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio and
climate controls. By using voice commands,
you can keep your hands on the wheel and
your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice button
on the steering wheel and wait for
the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context and
the description of the command tell you what
to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
367
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For
example, you could say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of
choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages
of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen.Help
Included here are some of the most popular
commands for each SYNC 3 feature.
368
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16".*Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "88.7 FM" or
"1580 AM".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “88.7 FM HD 1”.*FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-connected device.Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device.USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre
to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
369
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to
browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
* This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 59.0°F (15°C)-86.0°F (30°C).Climate Set Temperature ___
Climate Help
370
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 417).Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny".Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call
Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___
371
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If the full number was not entered with the first command, you can continue saying the number.<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you would like to hear.Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
372
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following commands
to set a destination or find a point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or an address.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality.Find an Address
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find Intersection
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for nearby such as "Destination nearest
restaurants".
Destination Nearest ___
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Destination Previous Destination
Allows you to route to your home address.Destination Home
373
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3.Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device.Find New Apps
374
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the mobile app on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app if the app is running on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app, followed
by help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be
available in all markets. Activation and a
subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Forecast
Help
375
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Phone Confirmation On
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Phone Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
376
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
377
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
ENTERTAINMENT
E205443
378
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
PresetsC
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
*SIRIUS
*CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections.Apps
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
379
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on the
radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen,
select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only enter
a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's call
numbers, you can select:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit without
changing the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station and
then press and hold one of the memory
preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while
the system saves the station and then
returns.
There are two preset banks available for AM
and three banks for FM. To access additional
presets, tap the preset button. The indicator
on the preset button shows which bank of
presets you are currently viewing.
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system
includes hardware and a limited subscription
term that begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
380
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of SIRIUS
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for Sirius:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station.Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play.Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number.
381
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as
you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different
preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you
to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on
any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 417).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then press
and hold one of the memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SIRIUS. To access additional presets, tap the
preset button. The indicator on the preset
button shows which bank of presets you are
currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 417).
382
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a
weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interference
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This message should disap-
pear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce
audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
383
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this channel.Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring signal…
No action required. The process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check channel guide.
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription updated
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 417).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
384
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature for
stations that have more than 1 HD multicast
(For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and
Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this
button allows you cycle through all of the
HD stations on that specific frequency. For
example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1,
HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly
causes the radio to cycle through the HD
stations in a cyclic increasing order.
385
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes
before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station
may mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital
broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the
station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts
to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when
the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or
digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
386
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio broad-
caster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio
volume.
No action required. The reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait
until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD
Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the
audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
No action required. The station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast
channel when recalling a preset or
from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form. *Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match
currently playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form. *Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown
for currently selected frequency.
387
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company
and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed, added
or deleted at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
* You can find the form here:
Website
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat.Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number
one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
388
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not
highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number
one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the currently
playing track, press the cover art or Info
button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide
30-second skip buttons when you listen to
audio books or podcasts. These buttons
allow you to skip forward or backward within
a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist.Browse
This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all
tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories.
New Search
Play All
389
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the
category you are browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your
USB device.
Explore Device
390
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the instrument
panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB media
devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb
drives, and charge devices if they support
this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain audio
apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or
bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 414).
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod, iPhone,
and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000
songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the touchscreen
to access your climate control features.
Depending on your vehicle line and option
package, your climate screen may look
different from one of the screens shown
below. Your screen may not contain all of
the features shown.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 417).
391
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E205823
Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.A
Heated steering wheel:B
392
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on.
Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about 5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F in
temperatures as low as -4°F. The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F and operates independently from the heated
seats and other climate-control functions. The heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide
maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel.
Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated
steering wheel may also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your vehicle off.
Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.C
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the
highest speed and the driver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin covering
of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents.
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 127).
AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the
vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
D
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering
the vehicle.
E
DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch the off and link the passenger temperature to the
driver temperature, touch the DUAL button.
F
Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically turn on when you or your passenger adjust the
passenger temperature.
393
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.G
Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that circulates in your vehicle.H
Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX A/C.
Rear: A pop up appears on the screen to display the rear control options.I
Touch the power icon to switch the rear climate control functions off and on.
Touch Rear Climate to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate settings. Touch it again to prevent the rear seat
passengers from adjusting the settings. Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust the rear climate
settings.
Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
To adjust fan speed, touch + or – next to the fan icon.
Touch Rear again to close the rear controls. Closing the rear climate control functions does not affect their current settings.
Manual airflow distribution controls:J
Footwell and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents,
and provides outside air to reduce window fogging.
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.K
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated
air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest
speed.
394
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even when you
switch the air conditioning A/C button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed
to cool down the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the interior.
Note: Recirculatied air may turn off automatically (or the system may preventit from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C
to reduce risk of fogging. It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes during hot weather in order
to improve cooling efficiency.
395
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
PHONE
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of the system. Once you pair your cell phone,
you can access many options using the
touchscreen or voice commands. While the
system supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model as
it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
396
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website:
Websites
owner.lincoln.com
Websites
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available when a phone
is paired and connected.
397
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E205447
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent Call ListA
398
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.ContactsB
Selecting this button allows you to choose a
specific letter to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options.Phone SettingsC
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts. See Settings (page 417).
Displays all recent text messages.Text MessagesD
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone KeypadE
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a call.Call
Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail. New text message notifications are not
displayed on the screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not DisturbF
Users with phones having voice services may
see a button to access the feature. For
example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A
press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
399
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the number
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an entry
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in your
phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and
number display on the screen along with the
call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
• 911 Assist (United States and Canada
Only). See Settings (page 417).
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
401
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the button
on the steering
wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
Item
Mute You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Privacy
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by
your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm
to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
402
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disables
some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer
with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest
iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 347).
2. Select Apple CarPlay on the touchscreen.
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple
CarPlay. Select the name of your device
and select:
Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay
home screen and select the SYNC app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to your
device from Google Play to prepare your
device (this may require mobile data
usage).
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 347).
Note: Android Auto may default to off, so
you may need to enable it from the Settings
screen.
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer
icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the
bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch
the option to return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
403
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
NAVIGATION
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D city
maps show detailed outlines of buildings,
visible land use, landscape features, and
detailed railroad infrastructure for the most
essential cities around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models of
entire city areas including navigable roads,
parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D
landmarks and city models appear in 3D map
mode only. Coverage of these varies and
improves with updated map releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see a
farther away view of the map.
You can adjust the view in preset increments.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the
map.
The information bar tells you the names of
streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over
them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on the
right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current
location.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI) grouping
icon: You can choose up to three
POI icons to display on the map. If
the chosen POIs are located close
together or are at the same location a box is
used to display a single category icon
404
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
instead of repeating the same icon, in order
to reduce clutter. When you select the box
on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the pop
up to see a list of the available POIs. You can
scroll through and select POIs from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow
will be indicated on the map by green (clear),
yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road
highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the
information is available and varies across the
US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different types
of incidents. See Settings (page 417).
You can set a destination by hovering above
a location and selecting:
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state
405
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example,
you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
One to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destinations
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
406
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
These locations cannot be deleted individually. To delete them, preform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 434).
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select:Home
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select:Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.Favorites
To add Favorites:
Select this button and enter a location into the destination bar.Add a Favorite
Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered.Search
407
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen.Save
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the
favorites screen.
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle configuration):Point of Interest (POI)
Categories
Food
Fuel
hotel
ATM
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to
find what you are looking for.
See All
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
408
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options.Start
Uses the fastest moving roads possible.Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then
returns you to the map mode screen.
Cancel
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination.Start
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat
route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to
the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your
destination.
409
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to
cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation.Highway Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they
are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations.
You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route.Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A
screen then appears and you can press:
410
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list.
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires
an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 417).Navigation Settings
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen.Cancel Route
Selecting this option switches off the audio navigation guidance. Press the button again to un-mute guidance.Mute Guidance
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information
on how to set waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
411
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can also have
the system set the
order for you by
pressing:
GoTo return to your
route press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation route
as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass)
while on an active route. This brings up
the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination has
been selected, the screen allows you to
set the destination as a waypoint by
selecting:
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your
waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the
location. You can select up to five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
412
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1110
cities (1049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address, phone number and a star rating.
Press More Information to see a photo, a
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation
and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate and
subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link information. It helps you locate
the best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see current
sports scores. See Apps (page 414).
The system calculates a reasonable efficient
route based on available speed limits, traffic,
and road conditions. You may know a local
short cut that is more efficient at a given time
than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you
should expect a slight difference in minutes
or miles with the SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States
and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico.
You can also visit:
413
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model of
your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to HERE
by going to www.here.com/mapcreator.
HERE evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink
enabled smartphone apps. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control
main features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Websites
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded. Some
apps will work automatically with no setup.
Other apps will want you to configure your
personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
Applink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
414
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the App needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Connect Mobile
Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford in
the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage statistics
and debugging information. We retain this
data for only as long as necessary to provide
this service, troubleshoot, and improve
products and services and to offer you
products and services that may interest you
where allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for each
connected device the first time you select a
mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not
responsible for any additional charges you
may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 417).
App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change a
permission group status any time when not
driving, by using the settings menu. While in
the settings menu, you can also see the data
included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle information,
Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed,
and/or Push notifications. You can enable all
groups or none of them during the initial app
permissions prompts. The settings menu
offers individual group permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions, apps
will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3
unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings
menu.
415
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click
on Coverage map and details for a complete
listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, it can help you locate the best
gas prices, find movie listings, get current
traffic alerts, view the current weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see scores
to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location
or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active
navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.Movie Listings
416
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the
chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to
10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and adjust
the settings for many of the system features.
To access additional settings, swipe the
screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the
following:
417
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off.Speed Adaptive Volume
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media device
such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is
the active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following options
for active devices only.
418
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing,
you can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is
playing, you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’ s music files. If no cover art for the files
exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files.
This overrides any cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.Reset Media
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Database Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device.Device Information
419
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows
on the right adjust the minute. You can then
select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone Update
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to GPS Time
The system automatically saves any updates
you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access the
following:
ActionMenu Item
OnBluetooth
Off
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device
is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing
a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a
device and the available options.
420
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model as
it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
421
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in the previous table.Add a Bluetooth Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options:
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected
device.
Connect
Disconnect
Allows you to see phone and device information.Device Information
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to
date.
Auto-Download Contacts
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose:Sort By:
422
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact
list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive a call. This option may not be available
for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ringtone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
423
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert (Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message.Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when
the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call.Roaming Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low.Low Battery Notification
911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the
United States and Canada.
Select this button to modify the on or off
setting for this feature. If the mobile phone’ s
contacts have been downloaded, you can
adjust the following option:
424
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick
access at the end of the 911 Assist call process.
Set Emergency Contacts
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source such
as AM or FM is the active media source.
Pressing the button allows you to access the
following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on current
radio source, If Available)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system
display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets (AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the
currently tuned source.
425
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.3D City Model
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots.Breadcrumbs
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.POI Icons
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed
by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map.Incident Map Icons
426
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred
route setting.
Always Use ___ Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance.Use HOV Lanes
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination.Automatically Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Eco Time Penalty
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based
on heavy traffic flow information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible.
Dynamic Route Guidance
427
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance Prompts
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data plan
associated with the connected device.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage statistics
and debugging information. Updates may
take place automatically.
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
428
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on
SYNC 3.
OnMobile Apps
Off
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu
disables automatic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app updates.Update Mobile Apps
There are three possible statuses:
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive an update.No update is required.The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Select this button if an update is required and
you want to request this update manually. For
example, when your mobile device is connected
to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select:
Request Update
429
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing
the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also be SYNC 3
enabled apps listed under
these options.
Note: Ford and Lincoln are not responsible
or liable for any damages or loss of privacy
relating to usage of an app, or dissemination
of any vehicle data that you approve Ford
and Lincoln to provide to an app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
Menu Item
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touch-
screen.
Touch Screen Beep
When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have
an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection.
Automatic System Updates
430
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Information pertaining to the system and its software.About
Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal
data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi
You can adjust the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates.Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.View Available Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may
require a security code to connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such
as the signal strength, connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already
connected.
Wi-Fi Available Notifications
431
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color all
the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: You vehicle may not have all of these
features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a personal
door keypad code. To add or erase a
personal code, you first need to enter the
five-digit factory set code. You can find this
code on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box or from your authorized dealer.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner manual.
432
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your system.
You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside
light level.
Auto
The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing.Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier.Night
The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the screen back on,
simply tap the screen.
Off
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions.Auto Dim
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings by
selecting the following options.
433
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations.Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts name with you before
making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands
when the voice button is pressed.
Voice Command List
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the system
is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit code
must be entered to enable and disable valet
mode. You can use any PIN you chose but
you must use the same PIN to disable valet
mode. The system asks you to input the
code.
Note: If the system is locked and you cannot
remember the PIN, please contact the
Customer Relationship Center.
For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility, visit
the Ford or Lincoln website.
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
434
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings on your cell
phone may be affecting SYNC 3
performance.
There is background noise
during a phone call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for
the microphone icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the
door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that
your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to be restarted.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not able to
download my phonebook.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
435
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Limitations on your cell phone's capab-
ility.
The system says "Phone-
book downloaded" but my
SYNC 3 phonebook is
empty or is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to
your cell phone's memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my cell phone
to SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your
device, then trying again.
Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative
to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
436
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with the your
vehicle make and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system
to activate this settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if
the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone.
437
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not
supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through
Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Audible text messages do
not work on my cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual
for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider
and software version.
This is a cell phone limitation.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your
vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or
active security settings.
438
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very
hot or cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize my device when I start
my vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have
started the media player on your device.
This is a device-dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song details are populated.
Your music files may not contain the
correct artist, song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize music that is on my
device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version.The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass
storage to media transfer protocol class.
The song may have copyright protection
that does not allow it to play.
Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 378).The file format is not supported by SYNC
3.
Perform a master reset. See Settings (page 417).The device needs to be re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
439
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect my device,
I sometimes do not hear
any sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB, select AirPlay from the devices
Control Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay
from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connection.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a unique
identifier, such as part of the MAC address.
Multiple Access points within range with the
same SSID.
440
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Position the vehicle close to the hotspot with
the front of the vehicle facing the hotspot
direction and remove obstacles if possible.
Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cord-
less phones may cause interference.
Weak signal probably due to distance from
the hotspot, obstruction or high interference.
Disconnecting after successful connection.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated wind-
shield, try positioning the vehicle so that the
windshield is not facing the hotspot. If you
have metallic window tinting but not on the
windshield, position the vehicle to face the
hotspot. If all windows are tinted, you can
open the windows in the direction of the
hotspot if that is feasible.
There may be an obstruction between SYNC
3 and the hotspot.
Poor signal seen by Sync despite being near
a hotspot.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
Please set the network to visible and try again.The hotspot was defined as a hidden network.A hotspot is not listed in the list of available
networks.
441
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 currently does not provide a hotspot.SYNC 3 does not provide a hotspot.SYNC 3 is not seen when searching for Wi-Fi
networks from your phone or other devices.
Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent,
test with another high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more
predictable.
Poor signal strength, too far from the hotspot,
hotspot is supporting multiple connections,
slow Internet connection or other problems.
Software download takes too long.
Test the connection with another device, if the
hotspot requires a subscription, you may
contact the service provider.
It is possible that there is no new software.
The connected hotspot may be a managed
one and it requires either a subscription or
agreeing to the terms and conditions.
SYNC 3 seems to connect with a hotspot and
the signal strength is excellent but the soft-
ware is not being updated.
442
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a compatible smartphone;
an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone
3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, make sure you pair and connect your
phone to SYNC 3 in order to find AppLink-
capable apps on your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB port with an Apple
USB cable.
You did not connect an Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select
"Connect Mobile Apps," SYNC 3 does not find
any applications.
Make sure you have downloaded and installed
the latest version of the app from your phone's
app store. Make sure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps require you to register
or login to the app on the phone before using
them with AppLink. Also, some may have a
"Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and
running on your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but I still cannot find
any apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover it
inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select
it and restart the app. If the app does not have
that option, select the phone's settings menu
Sometimes apps do not properly close and
re-open their connection to SYNC 3, over
ignition cycles, for example.
My phone is connected, my app(s) are running,
but I still cannot find any apps.
443
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
and select 'Apps', then find the particular app
and choose 'Force stop'. Do not forget to
restart the app afterward, then select "Connect
Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then swipe
up on the app to close it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app again to restart it.
After a few seconds, the app should then
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu.
Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on
your phone. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC
3 should be able to automatically re-connect
to your phone if you press the "Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue on some older
versions of the Android operating system that
may cause apps that were found on your
previous vehicle drive to not be found again
if you did not switch Bluetooth off.
My Android phone is connected, my app(s)
are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot
find any apps.
444
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a
moment, and plug the USB cable back in to
the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu.
If not, "Force Close" the application and restart
it.
You may need to reset the USB connection
to SYNC 3.
My iPhone is connected, my app is running, I
restarted the app but I still cannot find it on
SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device
by using the device's volume control buttons
which are most often found on the side of the
device.
The Bluetooth volume on the phone may be
low.
I have an Android phone. I found and started
my media app on SYNC 3, but there is no
sound or the sound is very low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have a limited number
of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to
connect. If you have more AppLink apps on
your phone than the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will not see all of your
apps listed in the SYNC 3 mobile apps menu.
I can only see some of the AppLink apps
running on my phone listed in the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps Menu.
445
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice
commands at the beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand what I am saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list
of voice commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command.You may be speaking too soon or at the
wrong time.
Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media
section.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand the name of a song
or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device.
For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain".
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix
featuring Jennifer Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you
have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name may have some
special characters that are not being
recognized by SYNC 3.
446
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your
phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe
Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your phonebook.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand or is calling the
wrong contact when I want
to make a call.
Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters
like *, - or +.
The contact name may contain special
characters.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your phonebook.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign names
stored on my cell phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE.
Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the
soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you,
giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting.
447
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names
(for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunci-
ation for these artists.
You may be saying the foreign names
using the currently selected language for
SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign tracks,
artists, albums, genres and
playlist names from my
media player or USB flash
drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded
human voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-speech voice prompt
technology.
The system generates
voice prompts and the
pronunciation of some
words may not be accurate
for my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
448
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text
display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most
popular languages spoken. If the selected language is not available,
SYNC 3 remains in the current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support the currently
selected language for the instrument
cluster and information and entertainment
display.
The language selected for
the instrument cluster and
information and entertain-
ment display does not
match the SYNC 3
language (phone, USB,
Bluetooth audio, voice
control and voice prompts).
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore
functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text
messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume
using the SYNC 3 system.
449
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting please call or visit the
Lincoln Website.
Lincoln Support
United States: 1-800-521-4140Customer Relationship Center
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
owner.lincoln.comWebsite
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
450
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit the online
store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
Lincoln original accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Side window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
Interior Style
• Floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment system*.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or coin holder.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Roof rack and carriers*.
• SUV camping tent*.
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
Peace of Mind
• Car cover*.
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo security shade.
• In-vehicle safe*.
• Locking fuel plug.
• Remote start.
• Roadside assistance kit*.
• Vehicle security.
• Wheel locks.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
451
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
452
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH
LINCOLN PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE
PLAN.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans
(U.S. Only)
Lincoln Protect means peace of mind. It’s the
extended service plan backed by the Lincoln
Motor Company, and provides more
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage. When you visit your
Lincoln Dealer, insist on genuine Lincoln
Protect extended service plans!
Lincoln Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Lincoln Protect
Extended Service Plan. With Lincoln Protect
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four mechanical Lincoln Protect
plans with different levels of coverage. Ask
your authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete it’ s
probably easier to list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans are
honored by all authorized Lincoln dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the
day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage and other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Protect plan coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new
owner. Which should give you and your
potential buyer a little more peace of mind.
453
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lincoln Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
Lincoln Protect also offers a Premium
Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled
maintenance, and selected wear items. The
coverage is prepaid, so you never have to
worry about the cost of your vehicle’s
maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Lincoln Protect
Extended Service Plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved with
no credit check or hassles. To learn more,
call our Lincoln Protect Extended Service
Plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Lincoln Protect (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Protect Extended
Service Plan. Lincoln Protect Extended
Service Plan is the only service contract
backed by Lincoln Motor Company of
Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you
purchase, Lincoln Extended Service Plan
provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Lincoln Protect Extended
Service Plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each
plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Protect
Extended Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
coverage.
454
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lincoln Protect
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
455
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lincoln Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 328).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
456
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 267).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
457
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
458
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
459
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
460
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
461
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
462
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Replace engine air filter.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
463
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3,000 mi
(4,800 km) of the message appearing in the
information display prompting you to change
your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi
(40,000 km)). Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints (if equipped with grease fittings).Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
464
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
465
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if non-sealed bearings are used (Two-wheel drive
vehicles).
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case (four-wheel drive
vehicles) fluid changes or level checks are
not required unless a leak is suspected or
the assembly has been submerged in water.
During long periods of trailer towing with
outside temperatures above 70°F (21°C) or
at wide-open throttle for long periods above
45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axle fluid
every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) or three
months, whichever comes first, if the rear
axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid. This
interval can be waived and the 150,000 mi
(240,000km) service interval can continue if
466
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
the rear axle is filled with 75W85 synthetic
gear fluid meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C942-A, part number XY-75W85-QL,
or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete
refill of Traction-Lok rear axles.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi
(4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and replacement
of the engine air filter.
467
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
468
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
469
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
470
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
471
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
472
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
473
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
474
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
475
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
476
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
477
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
478
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
479
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
480
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
481
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
482
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
483
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
484
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
485
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
486
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
487
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
488
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
489
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
490
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (I) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
491
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
492
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
493
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
494
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
495
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
496
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
497
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’ s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’ s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or without notice to you. You agree
to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to
time to review the then current version of
this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
498
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
499
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
500
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
501
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
502
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights
reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
503
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
504
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing Data
for the United States shall contain the
following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service® 20XX.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.”
505
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provisions
apply to the Data for Canada, which may
include or reflect data from third party
licensors (“Third Party Data”), including
Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada
(“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department of
Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is
licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a partic-
ular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective
of the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action alleging any loss,
injury or damages, direct or indirect,
which may result from the use or
possession of such Data; or (ii) in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage media
of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the
copy; or (iii) other materials packaged
with the copy, such as user manuals or
end user license agreements: “This data
includes information taken with permis-
sion from Canadian authorities, including
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®,
© The Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise
agreed by the parties, in connection with
the provision of any portion of the Data
for the Territory of Canada to End-Users
as may be authorized under the Agree-
ment, Client shall provide such End-
Users, in a reasonably conspicuous
manner, with terms (set forth with other
end user terms required to be provided
506
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
under the Agreement, or as otherwise
may be provided, by Client) which shall
include the following provisions on
behalf of the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data
of licensors, including Her Majesty the
Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department
of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on
an “as is” basis. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, make no guarantees,
representations or warranties
respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, effective-
ness, completeness, accuracy or
fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which may
result from the use or possession of
the data or the Data. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents
from and against any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the
use or possession of the data or the
Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the
parties under the Agreement. To the
extent that any of the provisions of this
Section are inconsistent with, or conflict
with, any other provisions of the Agree-
ment, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.
507
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: “Fuente:
INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-
01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO
DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian Geographic
Centre”. The foregoing notice
requirement for Jordan Data is
a material term of the Agree-
ment. If Client or any of its
permitted sublicensees (if any)
fail to meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license with
respect to the Jordan Data.
Jordan
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of Jordan
(“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise
Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities
for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan
or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition,
Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any)
and End-Users are restricted from using
the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications
if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity
using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or
(ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications”
508
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
shall mean Geomarketing applications,
GIS applications, mobile business asset
management applications, call center
applications, telematics applications,
public organization Internet applications
or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and
agrees that in certain countries of the
Europe Territory, Client will need to
obtain rights directly from third party
RDS-TMC code providers to receive and
use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to
deliver to End-Users Transactions in any
way derived from or based on such
Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE
shall deliver the Data incorporating
Traffic Codes to Client only after
receiving certification from Client of its
having obtained such rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends
for Belgium. Client shall, for each Trans-
action that uses Traffic Codes for
Belgium, provide the following notice to
the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium
are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license
granted to Client relating to making,
selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a
map fixed on a paper or paper-like
medium): (a) such license with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain is
conditioned on Client’s entering into and
complying with a separate written agree-
ment with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to
create and sell paper maps, Client’s
paying to the OS any and all applicable
paper map royalties, and Client’s
complying with the OS copyright notice
requirements; (b) such license for selling
or otherwise distributing for charge with
respect to Data for the Territory of Czech
Republic is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining prior written consent from
Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling
or distributing with respect to Data for the
Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on
Client’s obtaining a permit from
Bundesamt für Landestopografie of
Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from
using Data for the Territory of France to
create paper maps with a scale between
1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is
restricted from using any Data to create,
sell or distribute paper maps that are the
same or substantially similar, in terms of
data content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National Land
Survey of Sweden.
509
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data
for the Territory of Great Britain, Client
acknowledges and agrees that the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct
action against Client to enforce compli-
ance with the OS copyright notice (see
Section IV(D) below) and paper map
requirements (see Section IV(B) above)
contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright
and database right 2010
Contains Royal Mail data ©
Royal Mail copyright and
database right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed al
tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage:
© Bundesamt für
Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not received
approvals to distribute map data for the
following countries in such respective
countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan,
Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may
510
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
update such list from time to time. The
license rights granted to Client under this
TL with respect to the Data for such
countries are contingent upon Client’s
compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations, including, without limitation,
any required licenses or approvals to
distribute the Application incorporating
such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing RDS-
TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall
contain the following notice: “Product
incorporates traffic location codes which
is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and
its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view
it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not
remove any copyright notices that appear
and do not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
511
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if
you fail to comply with these terms and
conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform
substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt,
and (b) any support services provided by
NAV2 shall be substantially as described in
applicable written materials provided to you
by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will
make commercially reasonable efforts to
solve any problem issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with
a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty
is void if failure of the Data has resulted from
accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Data will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or
thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither
these remedies nor any product support
services offered by NAV2 are available
without proof of purchase from an authorized
international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
512
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers
and are protected by applicable copyright
and other intellectual property law and
treaties. The Data are provided solely on the
basis of a license to use, not sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder shall be submitted to the
Shanghai International Economic and Trade
Arbitration Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
513
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
514
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment. The term "IC"
before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept certain
terms and conditions. The following is a brief
summary of the terms and conditions that
apply to you. To view the full terms and
conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA
Products and/or Services, please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
515
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for your
personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to provide
SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are intended
as an aid to personal motoring and travel
planning, and do not provide comprehensive
or accurate information on all occasions. On
occasions, you may experience additional
delay as a result of using SUNA Products
and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is
not intended, or suitable, for use in
applications where time of arrival or driving
directions may impact the safety of the public
or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and active,
remain at all times responsible for observing
all relevant laws and codes of safe driving.
In particular, you agree to only actively
operate SUNA Products and/or Services
when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and
it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of the
SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable for
technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA
Products and/or Services at any time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the
manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any
third party for any damages either direct,
indirect, incidental, consequential or
otherwise arising out of the use of or inability
to use SUNA Products and/or Services even
if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised
of the possibility of such damages. You also
acknowledge that the neither Intelematics
nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any
warranties that relate to the availability,
accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products
516
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
and/or Services, and to the extent which it
is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State or
Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development may
mean that some information is not entirely
up-to-date. The information in this document
is subject to change without notice.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
517
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
518
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.......................................174
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................122
About This Manual............................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................182
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................182
Accessories....................................................451
Exterior Style........................................................451
Interior Style..........................................................451
Lifestyle..................................................................451
Peace of Mind......................................................451
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................87
Adjusting the Headlamps...........................278
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................279
Vertical Aim Adjustment...................................278
Adjusting the Pedals......................................80
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................74
Easy Entry and Exit Feature................................74
End of Travel Position..........................................74
Memory Feature....................................................74
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps..................................87
Airbag Disposal...............................................48
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................122
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..............283
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm............................................71
Ambient Lighting............................................89
Anti-Theft Alarm...............................................71
Arming the Alarm...................................................71
Disarming the Alarm..............................................71
Appendices....................................................488
Apps..................................................................414
..................................................................................414
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.......................416
Audible Warnings and Indicators...............101
Direction Indicator Chime..................................101
Headlamps On Warning Chime........................101
Key in Ignition Warning Chime..........................101
Parking Brake On Warning Chime...................101
Audio Control...................................................75
Media........................................................................77
Seek, Next or Previous........................................77
Type One.................................................................76
Type Two.................................................................77
Audio System................................................339
General Information...........................................339
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD..........................................................340
Rear Seat Audio Controls.................................342
Autolamps.........................................................85
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........86
Automatic Climate Control.........................122
Automatic Transmission..............................169
Brake-Shift Interlock...........................................172
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................173
SelectShift™ Automatic Transmission..............171
Understanding the Shift Positions of your
Automatic Transmission................................169
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................272
Autowipers........................................................81
Auxiliary Power Points.................................150
110 Volt AC Power Point....................................150
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................150
Locations...............................................................150
519
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.......................275
Blind Spot Information System..................201
False Alerts..........................................................206
Switching the System Off and On.................206
System Errors......................................................206
System Limitations.............................................205
Using the System................................................201
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............262
Booster Seats..................................................26
Types of Booster Seats.......................................26
Brake Fluid Check........................................273
Brakes..............................................................182
General Information............................................182
Breaking-In.....................................................228
Bulb Specification Chart..............................281
C
California Proposition 65................................11
Capacities and Specifications...................332
Specifications......................................................334
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................286
Center Console.............................................152
Changing a Bulb...........................................279
Central High-mounted Brake Lamp..............280
HID Headlamp Bulbs.........................................279
LED Lamps...........................................................280
License Plate Lamp Bulbs................................280
Changing a Fuse..........................................259
Fuses.....................................................................259
Changing a Road Wheel.............................319
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................320
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.............321
Tire Change Procedure....................................322
Changing the 12V Battery..........................275
Battery Management System..........................276
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................283
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................277
Checking MyKey System Status.................58
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................277
Childminder Mirror.........................................92
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................39
Child Restraint Positioning...........................29
Child Safety.......................................................16
General Information..............................................16
Child Safety Locks..........................................30
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................291
Cleaning Products.......................................285
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................292
Cleaning the Engine....................................288
Cleaning the Exterior..................................286
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................287
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................287
Stripes or Graphics.............................................287
Underbody...........................................................287
Under Hood.........................................................288
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens............................291
Cleaning the Interior...................................289
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior..............................................................290
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................289
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Climate.............................................................391
Climate Control..............................................122
Climate Controlled Seats............................142
Cooled Seats........................................................143
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................268
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........47
Creating a MyKey...........................................55
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................55
Cruise Control..................................................79
Principle of Operation........................................199
520
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................199
Customer Assistance..................................238
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps...............................86
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)...........................................87
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................87
Direction Indicators........................................88
Lane Change..........................................................88
Doors and Locks..............................................61
Drive Control.................................................207
Driver Select Suspension.................................207
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................43
Children and Airbags...........................................44
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................43
Driving Aids....................................................201
Driving Hints..................................................228
Driving Through Water...............................229
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................86
E
Economical Driving......................................228
Emission Control System............................166
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................167
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing......................................................168
End User License Agreement...................488
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ....................................488
Engine Block Heater.....................................157
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................158
Engine Coolant Check................................268
Adding Coolant...................................................268
Coolant Change..................................................270
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management...................................................272
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................270
Recycled Coolant...............................................270
Severe Climates..................................................270
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................70
Engine Oil Check.........................................266
Adding Engine Oil..............................................266
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................266
Engine Specifications..................................328
Drivebelt Routing................................................328
Entertainment................................................378
AM/FM Radio.......................................................380
Apps........................................................................391
Bluetooth Stereo or USB..................................389
CD (If equipped)..................................................388
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)..............384
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated).............380
Sources.................................................................379
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information....................................391
USB Ports..............................................................391
Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks...........................220
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................225
Hitches...................................................................221
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................226
Safety Chains......................................................224
Trailer Brakes.......................................................224
Trailer Hitch Cover.............................................220
Trailer Lamps.......................................................224
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).......................................................220
When Towing a Trailer......................................225
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options...................................14
521
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Exterior Mirrors.................................................91
Auto-Dimming Feature........................................92
Blind Spot Monitor................................................92
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors..................................91
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................92
Memory Mirrors.....................................................92
Power Exterior Mirrors..........................................91
Power-Folding Mirrors..........................................91
Signal Indicator Mirrors.......................................92
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................33
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................34
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy..................33
Floor Mats......................................................229
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................80
Four-Wheel Drive...........................................174
Front Parking Aid...........................................194
Fuel and Refueling........................................159
Fuel Consumption.........................................164
Calculating Fuel Economy................................165
Filling the Fuel Tank............................................165
Fuel Filler Funnel Location..........................161
Fuel Filter........................................................275
Fuel Quality....................................................160
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................160
Fuel Shutoff...................................................232
Fuses...............................................................246
Fuse Specification Chart............................246
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel...........252
Power Distribution Box.....................................246
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............145
Gauges..............................................................96
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................49
Intelligent Access..................................................49
General Maintenance Information...........456
Multi-Point Inspection........................................459
Owner Checks and Services...........................458
Protecting Your Investment.............................456
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?............................456
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................456
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................242
Getting the Services You Need................238
Away From Home..............................................238
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake.............................................183
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................232
HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control.......................191
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.......................278
Head Restraints.............................................129
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................130
Heated Seats...................................................141
Front Seats.............................................................141
Rear Seats..............................................................141
Heated Steering Wheel.................................79
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................127
Heated Exterior Mirror........................................127
Heated Rear Window.........................................127
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................122
Hill Start Assist...............................................183
Switching the System On and Off...................184
Using Hill Start Assist.........................................184
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................124
Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................124
General Hints........................................................124
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................124
522
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Recommended Settings for Cooling .............124
Recommended Settings for Heating..............124
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................124
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................182
Home Screen................................................366
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............262
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................239
Information Display Control.........................79
Information Displays.....................................102
General Information............................................102
Information Messages.................................108
AdvanceTrac™ / Traction Control
Messages.........................................................109
Alarm Messages...................................................110
Battery and Charging System Messages.......110
Blind Spot Information System Messages......111
Brake System Messages....................................112
Door Messages.....................................................112
Engine Messages.................................................113
Fuel Messages......................................................113
Keys and Intelligent Access Messages..........114
Maintenance Messages......................................115
MyKey™ Messages...............................................116
Off Road Messages..............................................117
Park Aid Messages..............................................118
Power Steering Messages.................................118
Remote Start Messages......................................119
Suspension System Messages.........................119
Tire Messages......................................................120
Trailer Messages.................................................120
Transmission Messages.....................................121
Installing Child Restraints..............................18
Child Seats...............................................................18
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats....................................................................22
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts ...........................18
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)..............................................21
Using Tether Straps..............................................23
Instrument Cluster..........................................96
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................86
Interior Lamps..................................................88
Front Map Lamps (If equipped).........................88
Rear Dome and Map Lamps..............................89
Interior Mirror...................................................92
Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................92
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................233
Connecting the Jumper Cables......................234
Jump Starting......................................................234
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................233
Removing the Jumper Cables.........................235
K
Keyless Entry...................................................68
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................68
Unlocking and Locking the Doors....................69
Keyless Starting.............................................153
Starting Your Vehicle..........................................154
Switching the Ignition On..................................153
Keys and Remote Controls...........................49
L
Lighting Control...............................................84
Headlamp Flasher................................................85
High Beams............................................................85
Lighting..............................................................84
General Information.............................................84
Limited Slip Differential.................................181
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services......12
523
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Lincoln Protect..............................................453
Lincoln Protect (CANADA ONLY)....................454
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................453
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers................210
Load Carrying................................................209
Load Limit.........................................................211
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................215
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................211
Locking and Unlocking..................................61
Activating Intelligent Access.............................62
Autolock..................................................................63
Auto Relock............................................................63
Autounlock.............................................................63
Battery Saver.........................................................64
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock.........................................................63
Illuminated Entry...................................................64
Illuminated Exit......................................................64
Power Door Locks.................................................61
Remote Control......................................................61
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.....................................................................62
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................319
M
Maintenance..................................................262
General Information...........................................262
Media Hub......................................................347
Memory Function..........................................132
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................134
Saving a PreSet Position...................................133
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................102
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................127
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................90
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Moonroof..........................................................94
Bounce-Back..........................................................95
Opening and Closing the Moonroof................94
Venting the Moonroof.........................................95
Motorcraft Parts............................................329
MyKey Troubleshooting................................59
MyKey™..............................................................54
Principle of Operation..........................................54
N
Navigation......................................................404
cityseeker..............................................................413
Destination Mode...............................................405
Map Mode............................................................404
Navigation Map Updates...................................413
Navigation Menu.................................................410
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.......................413
Waypoints..............................................................412
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.............460
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor...............................460
Normal Maintenance Intervals........................462
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................267
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................266
Opening and Closing the Hood...............262
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................243
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............243
Overhead Console.......................................152
524
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
P
Parking Aids....................................................193
Principle of Operation........................................193
Parking Brake.................................................183
Passive Anti-Theft System............................70
SecuriLock™............................................................70
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................70
Pedals................................................................80
Perchlorate........................................................12
Phone..............................................................396
During a Phone Call............................................401
Making Calls........................................................400
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................396
Phone Menu.........................................................397
Receiving Calls.....................................................401
Smartphone Connectivity.................................403
Text Messaging...................................................402
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking...............................61
Power Liftgate..................................................64
Obstacle Detection...............................................67
Opening and Closing the Liftgate....................65
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................67
Power Running Boards..................................72
Power Seats.....................................................131
Power Lumbar......................................................132
Power Recline......................................................132
Power Windows..............................................90
Accessory Delay....................................................91
Bounce-Back.........................................................90
One-Touch Down..................................................90
One-Touch Up.......................................................90
Window Lock.........................................................90
Protecting the Environment..........................15
R
Rear Axle..........................................................181
Rear Parking Aid............................................194
Obstacle Distance Indicator.............................194
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............126
Rear Quarter Windows..................................93
Rear Seats.......................................................134
Adjusting the Second Row Center 20%
Seat....................................................................139
Adjusting the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seat for E-Z Entry............................................136
Exiting the Third Row.........................................138
Folding Down the Second Row 40% Seat
.............................................................................134
Folding the Second Row Center 20% Seat
.............................................................................138
Placing the Second Row Outboard 40% Seats
in Cargo Mode.................................................135
PowerFold™ Third Row Seat.............................139
Reclining the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seatback...........................................................138
Returning to the Upright Position from the Full
Lowered Load Floor Position.......................136
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................209
Cargo Management System...........................209
Cargo Shelf and Divider...................................209
Rear View Camera........................................195
Using the Rear View Camera System............196
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................195
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............82
Rear Window Washer..........................................83
Rear Window Wiper.............................................82
Recommended Towing Weights................217
Reduced Engine Performance..................228
Refueling.........................................................162
System Warnings.................................................164
Remote Control...............................................50
Car Finder................................................................51
Intelligent Access Key.........................................50
Memory Feature....................................................53
Remote Start...........................................................51
Replacing the Battery..........................................50
Sounding the Panic Alarm...................................51
525
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Remote Start...................................................127
Automatic Settings..............................................128
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................292
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs.....................................................13
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.........................13
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................53
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................244
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......244
Roadside Assistance....................................231
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................232
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance
Program Coverage........................................232
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................232
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance......................................231
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance......................................231
Roadside Emergencies................................231
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................210
Adjusting the Crossbar......................................210
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................228
Running Out of Fuel......................................161
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................161
Filling a Portable Fuel Container......................161
S
Safety Canopy™...............................................45
Safety Precautions........................................159
Satellite Radio...............................................343
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)..................................................................345
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..................344
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service......................344
Troubleshooting..................................................345
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............468
Scheduled Maintenance............................456
Seatbelt Extension.........................................39
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................35
Second Row Comfort Guide..............................36
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................37
Belt-Minder™...........................................................37
Seatbelts...........................................................32
Principle of Operation..........................................32
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................36
Conditions of operation.......................................37
Seats.................................................................129
Security..............................................................70
Self-Leveling Suspension..........................208
Settings............................................................417
911 Assist...............................................................424
Ambient Lighting................................................432
Bluetooth..............................................................420
Clock......................................................................420
Display...................................................................433
General.................................................................430
Media Player.........................................................418
Mobile Apps.........................................................428
Navigation............................................................426
Phone.....................................................................421
Radio......................................................................425
Sound......................................................................417
Valet Mode...........................................................434
Vehicle...................................................................432
Voice Control.......................................................433
Wi-Fi........................................................................431
Side Airbags.....................................................44
Sitting in the Correct Position....................129
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains...................................312
526
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................464
Exceptions............................................................466
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................199
Stability Control..............................................187
Principle of Operation........................................187
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................154
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................156
Failure to Start......................................................155
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...................157
Important Ventilating Information....................157
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................156
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................156
Starting and Stopping the Engine.............153
General Information............................................153
Steering..........................................................206
Electric Power Steering....................................206
Steering Wheel................................................74
Storage Compartments...............................152
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................94
Sun Visors.........................................................93
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.....................................94
Supplementary Restraints System..............41
Principle of Operation...........................................41
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
SYNC™ 3..........................................................348
General Information...........................................348
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting..........................434
T
Tailgate
See: Power Liftgate..............................................64
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............328
Terrain Response...........................................191
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).........................240
Tire Care.........................................................298
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................299
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................298
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................300
Temperature A B C............................................299
Traction AA A B C..............................................299
Treadwear............................................................299
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..............313
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System..........................................314
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ..............................................................315
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................295
Towing a Trailer..............................................216
Load Placement...................................................216
Towing Points................................................226
Installing the Recovery Hook..........................237
Recovery Hook Location..................................236
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..............237
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........227
Emergency Towing.............................................227
Towing..............................................................216
Traction Control.............................................185
Principle of Operation........................................185
Trailer Sway Control......................................217
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................273
Transmission Code Designation................331
Transmission...................................................169
Transmission
See: Transmission...............................................169
Transporting the Vehicle............................236
527
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
U
Under Hood Overview................................264
Universal Garage Door Opener................145
HomeLink Wireless Control System...............145
USB Port..........................................................347
Using Cruise Control....................................199
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................200
Switching Cruise Control On and Off............199
Using Four-Wheel Drive...............................174
4WD Indicator Lights..........................................174
4WD Switch Positions.........................................174
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles.............................................................176
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles.............................................................176
Using Hill Descent Control..........................191
Principle of Operation.........................................191
Using Hill Descent Control................................191
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................59
Using Power Running Boards......................72
Automatic Power Deploy....................................72
Automatic Power Stow........................................72
Bounce-back..........................................................73
Enabling and Disabling........................................72
Manual Power Deploy.........................................72
Using Snow Chains.......................................312
Using Stability Control.................................188
Stability Control and Traction Control with Roll
Stability Control™ (RSC™)................................188
Using Traction Control.................................185
Switching the System Off .................................185
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........185
Using Voice Recognition............................367
Audio Voice Commands...................................369
Climate Voice Commands................................370
Mobile App Voice Commands.........................374
Navigation Voice Commands..........................373
Phone Voice Commands...................................371
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.......................................................375
Voice Settings Commands...............................376
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)..............................................241
V
Vehicle Care..................................................285
General Information...........................................285
Vehicle Certification Label.........................330
Vehicle Identification Number..................330
Vehicle Storage............................................293
Battery...................................................................294
Body.......................................................................293
Brakes...................................................................294
Cooling system...................................................294
Engine...................................................................293
Fuel system..........................................................293
General.................................................................293
Miscellaneous.....................................................294
Removing Vehicle From Storage...................294
Tires.......................................................................294
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................122
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............330
Voice Control...................................................78
Type One.................................................................78
Type Two.................................................................79
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators....................98
4X2...........................................................................101
4X4 Auto.................................................................101
4X4 HIGH...............................................................101
Anti-Lock Braking System..................................98
Battery.....................................................................98
Brake System.........................................................98
Cruise Control........................................................98
Direction Indicator................................................98
Door Ajar.................................................................99
Engine Coolant Temperature............................99
528
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Engine Oil...............................................................99
Fasten Seatbelt.....................................................99
Front Airbag...........................................................99
High Beam..............................................................99
Hill Descent............................................................99
Liftgate Ajar............................................................99
Low Fuel Level......................................................99
Low Tire Pressure Warning................................99
Low Washer Fluid................................................100
Parking Lamps.....................................................100
Powertrain Fault..................................................100
Service Engine Soon..........................................100
Stability Control System....................................100
Stability Control System Off.............................100
Transmission Tow/Haul.......................................101
Washer Fluid Check.....................................274
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................286
See: Wipers and Washers....................................81
Waxing............................................................288
Welcome Lighting...........................................88
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel..........................319
Wheels and Tires.........................................295
General Information...........................................295
Technical Specifications...................................326
Windows and Mirrors.....................................90
Windshield Washers......................................82
Windshield Wipers...........................................81
Speed Dependent Wipers...................................81
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades....................277
Wipers and Washers.......................................81
529
Navigator (TB5) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
